Amx4 Series Diagnostics

GE Medical Systems

Technical Publications Direction 46–017207 Revision 11

AMX-4 Series Diagnostics

Copyright 1988, 1989, 1990, 1991, 1993, 1997, 1998, 1999 By General Electric Co.

Advanced Service Documentation Property of GE For GE Service Personnel Only No Rights Licensed Ċ Do Not Use or Copy Disclosure to Third Parties Prohibited

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS

REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS SERVICE MANUAL IS AVAILABLE IN ENGLISH ONLY.

WARNING

IF A CUSTOMER’S SERVICE PROVIDER REQUIRES A LANGUAGE OTHER THAN ENGLISH, IT IS THE CUSTOMER’S RESPONSIBILITY TO PROVIDE TRANSLATION SERVICES. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO SERVICE THE EQUIPMENT UNLESS THIS SERVICE MANUAL HAS BEEN CONSULTED AND IS UNDERSTOOD. FAILURE TO HEED THIS WARNING MAY RESULT IN INJURY TO THE SERVICE PROVIDER, OPERATOR OR PATIENT FROM ELECTRIC SHOCK, MECHANICAL OR OTHER HAZARDS.

CE MANUEL DE MAINTENANCE N’EST DISPONIBLE QU’EN ANGLAIS.

AVERTISSEMENT

SI LE TECHNICIEN DU CLIENT A BESOIN DE CE MANUEL DANS UNE AUTRE LANGUE QUE L’ANGLAIS, C’EST AU CLIENT QU’IL INCOMBE DE LE FAIRE TRADUIRE. NE PAS TENTER D’INTERVENTION SUR LES ÉQUIPEMENTS TANT QUE LE MANUEL SERVICE N’A PAS ÉTÉ CONSULTÉ ET COMPRIS. LE NON-RESPECT DE CET AVERTISSEMENT PEUT ENTRAÎNER CHEZ LE TECHNICIEN, L’OPÉRATEUR OU LE PATIENT DES BLESSURES DUES À DES DANGERS ÉLECTRIQUES, MÉCANIQUES OU AUTRES.

WARNUNG

DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH EXISTIERT NUR IN ENGLISCHER SPRACHE. FALLS EIN FREMDER KUNDENDIENST EINE ANDERE SPRACHE BENÖTIGT, IST ES AUFGABE DES KUNDEN FÜR EINE ENTSPRECHENDE ÜBERSETZUNG ZU SORGEN. VERSUCHEN SIE NICHT, DAS GERÄT ZU REPARIEREN, BEVOR DIESES KUNDENDIENST–HANDBUCH NICHT ZU RATE GEZOGEN UND VERSTANDEN WURDE. WIRD DIESE WARNUNG NICHT BEACHTET, SO KANN ES ZU VERLETZUNGEN DES KUNDENDIENSTTECHNIKERS, DES BEDIENERS ODER DES PATIENTEN DURCH ELEKTRISCHE SCHLÄGE, MECHANISCHE ODER SONSTIGE GEFAHREN KOMMEN.

ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO SÓLO EXISTE EN INGLÉS.

AVISO

SI ALGÚN PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS AJENO A GEMS SOLICITA UN IDIOMA QUE NO SEA EL INGLÉS, ES RESPONSABILIDAD DEL CLIENTE OFRECER UN SERVICIO DE TRADUCCIÓN. NO SE DEBERÁ DAR SERVICIO TÉCNICO AL EQUIPO, SIN HABER CONSULTADO Y COMPRENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE SERVICIO. LA NO OBSERVANCIA DEL PRESENTE AVISO PUEDE DAR LUGAR A QUE EL PROVEEDOR DE SERVICIOS, EL OPERADOR O EL PACIENTE SUFRAN LESIONES PROVOCADAS POR CAUSAS ELÉCTRICAS, MECÁNICAS O DE OTRA NATURALEZA.

i



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ATENÇÃO

ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA SÓ SE ENCONTRA DISPONÍVEL EM INGLÊS. SE QUALQUER OUTRO SERVIÇO DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA, QUE NÃO A GEMS, SOLICITAR ESTES MANUAIS NOUTRO IDIOMA, É DA RESPONSABILIDADE DO CLIENTE FORNECER OS SERVIÇOS DE TRADUÇÃO. NÃO TENTE REPARAR O EQUIPAMENTO SEM TER CONSULTADO E COMPREENDIDO ESTE MANUAL DE ASSISTÊNCIA TÉCNICA. O NÃO CUMPRIMENTO DESTE AVISO PODE POR EM PERIGO A SEGURANÇA DO TÉCNICO, OPERADOR OU PACIENTE DEVIDO A‘ CHOQUES ELÉTRICOS, MECÂNICOS OU OUTROS.

AVVERTENZA

IL PRESENTE MANUALE DI MANUTENZIONE È DISPONIBILE SOLTANTO IN INGLESE. SE UN ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE ESTERNO ALLA GEMS RICHIEDE IL MANUALE IN UNA LINGUA DIVERSA, IL CLIENTE È TENUTO A PROVVEDERE DIRETTAMENTE ALLA TRADUZIONE. SI PROCEDA ALLA MANUTENZIONE DELL’APPARECCHIATURA SOLO DOPO AVER CONSULTATO IL PRESENTE MANUALE ED AVERNE COMPRESO IL CONTENUTO. NON TENERE CONTO DELLA PRESENTE AVVERTENZA POTREBBE FAR COMPIERE OPERAZIONI DA CUI DERIVINO LESIONI ALL’ADDETTO ALLA MANUTENZIONE, ALL’UTILIZZATORE ED AL PAZIENTE PER FOLGORAZIONE ELETTRICA, PER URTI MECCANICI OD ALTRI RISCHI.

ii



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION

TITLE

PAGE

REVISION HISTORY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xiii

1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Diagnostics Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 Diagnostics Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Sys Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Charge Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1–1 1–1 1–2 1–3 1–4 1–5 1–6 1–6

2

ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 Entering Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć1Ć1 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2Ć1Ć2 Exit Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2–1 2–1 2-2 2-3

3

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć1Ć1 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć2Ć1 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6Ć2 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3Ć6Ć3 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3–1 3–1 3-2 3–3 3-4 3–5 3–6 3–7 3–9 3-9 3-10 3-11

SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 4-1 System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć1Ć1 Running System Block Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć2Ć1 Running Op Switch Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Display Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Battery Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6Ć2 Read a Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4Ć6Ć3 Write Then Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4–1 4–1 4-2 4–3 4-4 4–5 4–6 4–7 4–9 4-9 4-10 4-11

4

iii



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.) SECTION 5

TITLE

PAGE

I/O PORTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Selected Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Charger and Drive Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 On–Board Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 A/D Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 Operator I/O Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Generator and AEC Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Generator Control 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Charger and Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 AEC Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 Generator Control 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 A/D Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 Set Back–Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 On–Board Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Right Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16 Left Speed Command DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17 Charge Current DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18 Leakage Current Compensation DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 Programmable Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-20 Filament Current Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 KVP Demand DAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22 Watchdog Timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 Variables Unique To PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 and 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-24 kVp/mAs Display After Exposure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 Critical Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 Force the Use of 137 kV in Tapcal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27 Force an Extended Charge Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5–1 5–1 5–2 5–3 5–4 5–5 5–6 5–7 5–8 5–9 5–10 5–11 5–12 5–13 5–13 5–14 5–14 5–14 5–14 5–14 5–15 5–15 5–15

6

DATA LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Enter Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć2Ć1 Enter View Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6Ć2Ć2 Enter Initialize Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Load Data Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6–1 6–1 6–1 6-3 6-4 6–4

7

ERROR 7-1 7-2 7Ć2Ć1 7Ć2Ć2 7-3 7-4 7-5

7–1 7–1 7–2 7-3 7-4 7–5 7–6 7–7

LOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entering Error Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initialize Histograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Error List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

iv

5–15 5–16 5–16 5–16 5–16



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.) SECTION

TITLE

PAGE

8

CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Entering Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8–1 8–1 8–2

9

DATA BASE ACCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Entering Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć2Ć1 Entering Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć2Ć2 Exit Without Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 Data Base Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 Selecting Data Base Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5 Changing Data Base Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 Check Sum and Limit Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Demonstration Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć1 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć2 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć3 Test Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć4 Enter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć5 Change Field Light On-Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć6 Test Change Again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć7 Enter Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć8 On Your Own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9Ć7Ć9 Return The Original Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Floor Scuffing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9–1 9–1 9–1 9-2 9-3 9–3 9–4 9–4 9–4 9–4 9-5 9-6 9-6 9-7 9-7 9-7 9-8 9-8 9-8 9–8

10

DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 Auto Cal Filament Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Battery Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Field Light Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10–1 10–1 10–5 10–6 10–7 10–8 10–9 10–12 10–17 10–18

v



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


TITLE

PAGE

DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 11-1 Calibratible X–Ray Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Filament Current Calibration Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Turns Ratio Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 System Resistance Taps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Drive Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6 Charge Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 Battery Parameters for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 Battery Parameters for PROMS 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . 11-10 Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-11 Auto Cal Filament Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12 Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS 46–303815G1/ 46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13 Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS 46–329187G1 or G2/ 46–329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12

ERROR 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-4

CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applications Error Handling Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circular Error Buffer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Histogram Of Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13

THEORY 13–1 13-1 Power–up Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2 Visual Indication Of Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3 Power Up Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4 80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test – 00) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-5 EPROM Checksum Test (test – 01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6 Ram Battery Test (test – 02) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-7 External Ram Test (test – 03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8 Calibration Data Checksum Test (test – 04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Ć8Ć1 Checksum By-pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-9 Watchdog Timer Test (test – 05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-10 Programmable Interval Timer Test (test – 06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-11 A/D Converter Circuitry Test (test – 07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-12 Application Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-13 Charge Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Ć13Ć1 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-302688G1/46-302687G1, 46-303272G1/46-303273G1 and 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Ć13Ć2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1 . . . . . . . . . . . 13Ć13Ć3 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46-329187G1 or G2/46-329188G1 or G2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vi

11–1 11–1 11–5 11–6 11–7 11–8 11–11 11–15 11–16 11–18 11–19 11–20 11–21 11–22 12–1 12–1 12–1 12–1 12–1

13–1 13–1 13–1 13–2 13–2 13–2 13–2 13–2 13-3 13–4 13–4 13–4 13–4 13–5 13-5 13-7 13-9

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11

AMX-4 SERIES DIAGNOSTICS DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Cont.) SECTION

TITLE 13-14 13Ć14Ć1 13Ć14Ć2 13-15 13Ć15Ć1 13Ć15Ć2 13Ć15Ć3 13-16 13Ć16Ć1 13Ć16Ć2 13Ć16Ć3 13Ć16Ć4 13Ć16Ć5 13Ć16Ć6 13-17 13-18 13-19 13-20 13-21 13-22 13Ć22Ć1 13Ć22Ć2 13Ć22Ć3 13Ć22Ć4 13Ć22Ć5 13Ć22Ć6 13-23 13-24 13-25 13Ć25Ć1 13Ć25Ć2 13Ć25Ć3 13Ć25Ć4 13Ć25Ć5 13Ć25Ć6 13Ć25Ć7 13Ć25Ć8 13Ć25Ć9 13-26 13-27 13-28

PAGE

Battery Charge Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–15 Battery Charger Run-Time Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46-316685G1/ 46-316686G1 and Later) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–15 Drive Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-15 Drive Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-16 Drive Control Software Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18 Generator Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–21 Generator Control Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Auto Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22 Field Light Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–22 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 . . . . . . . 13–23 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 or 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–24 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 . . . . . . . 13–25 Battery Aging for Firmware 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and Earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–26 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–329187G1 or G2/46–329188G1 or G2 (SMART GAUGE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–26 Discharge Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-26 Emergency Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Recharge Phases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-28 Voltage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Diagnostic Aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Battery Aging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-32 Heat Storage Tube Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33 Service Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–33 Drive Handle Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33 Battery Charger Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-33 Battery Voltmeter Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 Generator Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 mAs Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 kVp Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-34 Tap Relay Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35 Filament Current (X-ray Tube Characteristics) Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-35 Field Light On Time Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-36 Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36 Data Log Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36 Data Base Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13–36

vii




15

APPENDIX

TITLE

PAGE

TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 Isolating Battery Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Ć1Ć1 Voltage Drop Under Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 CPU Dip Switch Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 Generator Cal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Ć3Ć1 Tube Spits During CALIBRATE TAPS" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Ć3Ć2 X-ray Word Limit During CAL FIL CUR TBL" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Ć3Ć3 Triggering - The Oscilloscope Prior to CALIBRATE kVp" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to Capacity Displayed (Firmware 46–329187G1 or G2 and 46–329188G1 or G2 Only) . . . . .

14–1 14–1 14-1 14–2 14–3 14-3 14-3 14-3

BLOCK DIAGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 Illustration Listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15–1 15–1

DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

A–1

viii

14–4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

REVISION HISTORY REV

DATE

REASON FOR CHANGE

0 1 2 3 4

Feb. 15, 1988 May 20, 1988 Sept. 15, 1989 Jan. 1, 1990 Jan. 25, 1991

5

Feb. 26, 1993

6

Dec. 17, 1993

7 8

Feb. 17, 1997 Mar. 10, 1997

9 10

July 14, 1997 Apr. 12, 1999

10

Apr. 28, 2003

Initial release. Complete diagnostics. Extensive programming changes. New PROMS, programming changes. New PROMS, extensive programming changes. Add new separate sections for new PROMS for System Diagnostics and for Data Base. Add new PROMS 46-316685G1/46-316686G1. Add Model Numbers 46-315161 Series. Deleted references to obsolete PROMS 46-279026G9/46-279150G8 and to Charger Board 46-232842G1 which are no longer in the field. Add Section 13-15-3, Drive Control Software Theory", and add Left & Right Drive Functional Flow" diagram to Section 15. Add PROMS 46-329187G1/46-329188G1. Add Model 46-329267 Series. Add Charger Board 46-288786G1. Corrected Monitor Full Capacity millivolts algoritm in Section 11. Changed name to AMX-4 Series Diagnostics;" added 2115090 and 2169360 models to effectivity (Section 1-1). Updated Sections 5-24 and 5-26. Updated Sections 4-5, 4-6-2, 4-6-3, 7-3, 9-7-1, 9-7-2, 9-7-5, 9-7-7. Added references to firmware 46-329187G2 and 46-329188G2 for Orion xray tube. Updated format for Avantx e-tools project.

LIST OF EFFECTIVE PAGES PAGE NUMBER

REVISION NUMBER

PAGE NUMBER

REVISION NUMBER

PAGE NUMBER

REVISION NUMBER

Title Page

11

5-1 thru 5-16

11

11-1 thru 11-22

11

i thru xiv

11

6-1 thru 6-4

11

12-1 thru 12-20

11

1-1 thru 1-6

11

7-1 thru 7-8

11

13-1 thru 13-36

11

2-1 thru 2-4

11

8-1 and 8-2

11

14-1 thru 14-4

11

3-1 thru 3-12

11

9-1 thru 9-8

11

15-1 thru 15-24

11

4-1 thru 4-12

11

10-1 thru 10-18

11

A-1 and A-2

11

ix



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

x



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

Direction 46–017207 Revision 11

AMX–4 Series Diagnostics

IMPORTANT! . . . X-RAY PROTECTION X-ray equipment if not properly used may cause injury. Accordingly, the instructions herein contained should be thoroughly read and understood by everyone who will use the equipment before you attempt to place this equipment in operation. The General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, will be glad to assist and cooperate in placing this equipment in use. Although this apparatus incorporates a high degree of protection against x-radiation other than the useful beam, no practical design of equipment can provide

complete protection. Nor can any practical design compel the operator to take adequate precautions to prevent the possibility of any persons carelessly exposing themselves or others to radiation. It is important that everyone having anything to do with x-radiation be properly trained and fully acquainted with the recommendations of the National Council on Radiation Protection and Measurements as published in NCRP Reports available from NCRP Publications, 7910 Woodmont Avenue, Room 1016, Bethesda, Maryland 20814, and of the International Commission xi

on Radiation Protection, and take adequate steps to protect against injury. The equipment is sold with the understanding that the General Electric Company, Medical Systems Group, its agents, and representatives have no responsibility for injury or damage which may result from improper use of the equipment. Various protective material and devices are available. It is urged that such materials or devices be used. CAUTION: United States Federal law restricts this device to use by or on the order of a physician.



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK.

xii



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

If you have any comments, suggestions or corrections to the information in this document, please write them down, include the document title and document number, and send them to: GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY MEDICAL SYSTEMS MANAGER – INFORMATION INTEGRATION, AMERICAS W–622 P.O. BOX 414 MILWAUKEE, WI 53201–0414

CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR STATEMENT All electrical installations that are preliminary to positioning of the equipment at the site prepared for the equipment shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. In addition, electrical feeds into the Power Distribution Unit shall be performed by licensed electrical contractors. Other connections between pieces of electrical equipment, calibrations, and testing

shall be performed by qualified GE Medical personnel. The products involved (and the accompanying electrical installations) are highly sophisticated, and special engineering competence is required. In performing all electrical work on these products, GE will use its own specially trained field engineers. All of GE’s electrical work on these products will comply with the

requirements of electrical codes.

the

applicable

The purchaser of GE equipment shall only utilize qualified personnel (i.e., GE’s field engineers, personnel of third-party service companies with equivalent training, or licensed electricians) to perform electrical servicing on the equipment.

DAMAGE IN TRANSPORTATION All packages should be closely examined at time of delivery. If damage is apparent, have notation “damage in shipment” written on all copies of the freight or express bill before delivery is accepted or “signed for” by a General Electric representative or a hospital receiving agent. Whether noted or concealed, damage MUST be reported to the carrier immediately

upon discovery, or in any event, within 14 days after receipt, and the contents and containers held for inspection by the carrier. A transportation company will not pay a claim for damage if an inspection is not requested within this 14 day period. Call Traffic and Transportation, Milwaukee, WI (414) 827–3449 /

8*285–3449 immediately after damage is found. At this time be ready to supply name of carrier, delivery date, consignee name, freight or express bill number, item damaged and extent of damage. Complete instructions regarding claim procedure are found in Section “S” of the Policy & Procedure Bulletins. 6/17/94

xiii




xiv



DIAGNOSTICS SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION ILLUSTRATION 1–1 AMX–4 IDENTIFICATION

RATING PLATE

1-1

General See Illustration 1–1. The AMX–4 Series (henceforth, in this publication, called AMX–4) is identified on the rating plate located on the top cover by Model Numbers 46–270157Gx, 46–315161Gx, 46–329267Gx, 2115090–x, 2169360–x, 2236420–x and any other model number associated with the AMX–4 Series mobile x–ray equipment. This book is not intended to be read from cover to cover like a novel. It is intended to introduce you to the AMX–4 Diagnostics Service Tools and provide reference material to help you isolate problems. You should be familiar with the operation and capabilities of Diagnostics before you need them. This book can help you with the process. Read Section 1 Introduction. It provides a brief overview of the diagnostics. Read Section 3-5 Loop Test or Section 4-5 Loop Test, as appropriate for the PROMS in this unit, and Section 9 Data Base Access. You will learn how to operate AMX–4 Diagnostics and gain some insight into it’s capabilities by performing the Demonstration Procedures. You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the conversions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when needed. Appendix 1 will help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are unable to use your calculator.

1-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 The AMX–4 contains operating safeguards providing maximum safety. Before servicing, be certain proper operating procedures are being used. Refer to Direction 46–017291 AMX–4 Operation for Model Numbers 46–270157G1, G2, G3, and G50. For Model Numbers 270157G4 and G5, refer to Direction 46–017334, AMX–4 (Japanese) Operation. For Model Numbers 46–315161 and 46–329267 Series, refer to Direction 46–017531, AMX–4 International Operation Manual (46–315161 & 46–329267 Series). For model numbers 2169360–x and 2236420–x, refer to Direction 2166913–100, AMX–4+ Operation Manual, and to Direction 2166911–100, AMX–4+ International Operation Manual.

ILLUSTRATION 1–2 PROM LOCATIONS ON CPU BOARDS

CALIBRATION PROM

DIAGNOSTICS & APPLICATION PROM

U51 U104

U6 U36

CPU BOARD 46-232828

1-2

CPU BOARD 46-264974

Diagnostics Identification Diagnostics are compatible with AMX–4 Model Numbers 46–270157, 46–315161, 46–329267, 2169360–x and 2236420–x Series. The PROM locations and identification numbers are shown in Illustration 1–2, PROM Locations On CPU Boards, and listed in Table 1–1, CPU Boards, Proms And Locations.

TABLE 1–1 CPU BOARDS, PROMS AND LOCATIONS

46-232828

CPU BOARD

46-264974

PROMS Diagnostics/Application Calibration

46-302688G1 U36 46-302687G1 U6

REV 0 REV 0

46-302688G1 U104 REV 0 46-302687G1 U51 REV 0


46-303272G1 U36 46-303273G1 U6

REV 0 REV 0

46-303272G1 U104 REV 0 46-303273G1 U51 REV 0


NOT APPLICABLE

46-303815G1 U104 REV 0 46-303816G1 U51 REV 0


NOT APPLICABLE

46-316685G1 U104 REV 0 46-316686G1 U51 REV 0


NOT APPLICABLE

46-329187G1 U104 REV 0 46-329188G1 U51 REV 0


NOT APPLICABLE

46-329187G2 U104 REV 0 46-329188G2 U51 REV 0

1-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 1–2 RELATED FMI’S PROMS

RELATED FMI’S

46–302688G1/46–302687G1

FMI 10271

46–303272G1/46–303273G1

FMI’S 10289 & 10291

46-303815G1/46-303816G1

N/A

46-316685G1/46-316686G1

FMI'S 10545 & 10546

46-329187G1/46-329188G1

N/A

46-329187G2/46-329188G2

N/A

ILLUSTRATION 1–3 DIAGNOSTIC PROGRAM STRUCTURE

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM

END SERVC MODE

DIAGNOSIS ITEMS PASSWORD REQUIRED

DATA LOG

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

1-3

ERROR LOG

CHARGE BATTERYS

Diagnostics Menu Items The Diagnostics program bypasses the applications program and operator console control functions, providing control for fault isolation. Illustration 1–3 is a diagram of the Diagnostics program structure. The Diagnostics Menu has four choices: 1.

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

Software routines to aid fault isolation.

2.

DATA LOG

Loading, viewing and initializing of the Data Log

1-3



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 3.

ERROR LOG

Viewing and initializing of the error log and error histogram files.

4.

CHARGE BATTERYS

Charge batteries when the AMX is not fully calibrated. Voltmeter and Charger must be calibrated.

ILLUSTRATION 1–4 SYS DIAGNOSTICS STRUCTURE

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

1-4

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

Sys Diagnostics As shown on Illustration 1–4, Diagnostics has the following menu items: 1.

SYS BLOCK TEST

Checks selected blocks of circuitry.

2.

OP SWITCH TEST

Displays the name of an operator accessible switch or switches that are closed.

3.

DISP CNTRL TEST

Exercises display controller to make sure all characters display correctly.

4.

DSP BATRY VOLTS

Displays battery voltage.

5.

LOOP TEST

Continuously reads and writes to a specified address.

1-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 1–5 DATA LOG FUNCTIONS

DATA LOG

INIT DATA LOG

VIEW DATA LOG

1-5

LOAD DATA LOG

Data Log As shown on Illustration 1–5, there are three Data Log functions: 1.

View

View Data Log information.

2.

Initialize

Sets all Data Log information to zero.

3.

Load Data log

Put information into specific Data Log eleĆ ments.

1-5



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 1–6 ERROR LOG FUNCTIONS

ERROR LOG

HISTOGRAMS

1-6

ERROR LIST

Error Log As shown on Illustration 1–6, there are two Error Log functions:

1-7

1.

Histograms

View and initialize the Histograms.

2.

Error List

View and initialize the Error List.

Charge Batteries Charge Batteries does not have additional menu selections. Follow the displayed prompts.

1-6



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 2 ENTERING DIAGNOSTICS ILLUSTRATION 2–1 SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION

KEY SWITCH

É É SERVICE SWITCH IN LEFT SIDE

2-1

Entering Diagnostics Before using Diagnostics you must start the diagnostic program. To start the diagnostic program, perform the following steps: 1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 2-1 up to the application position. 2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods.

If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position.

If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for more than two seconds, then back ON again.

If power is on and the top cover is removed, providing access to the processor board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board 46–264974 or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46–232828).

3. While Power Up tests are running, set the service switch down to the service position. When the diagnostic program is ready the END SERVCăMODE menu selection appears on the Message Display.

2-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 2–2 DIAGNOSTIC MENU SELECTION

DIAGNOSTICS PROGRAM kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

mAs ENTER DIAGNOSIS ITEMS

END SERVC MODE

mAs ENTER

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

DATA LOG

ERROR LOG

PASSWORD REQUIRED

CHARGER

After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection. Illustration 2–2 shows diagnostics selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DIĆ AGNOSIS ITEMS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp appears.

until the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that Data Base Access may be entered. 2-1-1

Entering Password Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After entering the password, the prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS indicating that Diagnostics has been entered. When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS. Press mAs to re–enter Diagnostics. If the password is not available, press mAsĂ until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears. The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the key switch off.

2-2


2-1-2


Exit Diagnostics To exit DIAGNOSIS ITEMS press mAsĂ when one of the menu selections shown on Illustration 2–2 displays. The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DIAGNOSIS ITEMS indicating that Diagnostics is not active. Return to the applications program by performing the following steps: 1. Press either kVp or kVp . displays.

The END SERVICE MODE menu selection

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for more than two seconds, then back ON again. 4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.

2-3




2-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 3 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and check blocks of circuitry. ILLUSTRATION 3–1 SYSTEM BLOCK TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS mAs ENTER

SYS BLOCK TESTS

DISP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

3-1

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

System Block Test System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U332 on CPU 46–232828 or U355 on CPU 46–264974 is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to the Filament and kVp Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Control Board at J2 pins 11 and 12, schematic location 2–D1. The signal leaves this board unaltered as KVP DMN FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2–E4, and returns to the CPU Board on connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5–E1. Analog buffer AR398 on CPU 46–232828 or AR392 on CPU 46–264974 conditions the signal for multiplexer U406 on CPU 46–232828 or U342 on CPU 46–264974. The signal is ultimately read by the processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test passes.

3-1



Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP5* signals at the Generator Control 2 Port, schematic location 4–B9 on CPU board. The six tap signals go to six identical circuits on the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these signals are converted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1 FDBK through TAP5 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port, schematic location 3–E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the test passes. By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil will produce a feedback signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should hear six (see note) equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If you don’t, and the test passes, check the relays. Note that with this firmware, TAP6* is not tested. 3-1-1

Running System Block Test Illustration 3–1 shows Block Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS BLOCK TESTS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST, then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test fails FAIL appears after the prompt. When Tap Test runs, you should hear six equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected. 3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs until the display goes blank and the test stops. Release mAs . The test makes one last check, then the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–2 SWITCH TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

3-2

LOOP TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

Op Switch Test Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Following is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations: EXPOSE

EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1.

PREP

PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1.

FIELD LIGHT

FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8 pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2, sheet 2.

DRIVE ENABLE

DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and 28 sheet 3 location D-1.

TUBE PARKED

TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins 13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1

RUN

SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on sheet 4 location H-6.

HIGH TUBE PRESS

X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins 6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through RoĆ tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.

BUMPER

BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1 A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1.

CHARGING CORD

LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1.

KVP-UP

KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2 3-3



REV 11

3-2-1

DIRECTION 46-017207 KVP-DWN

KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

MAS-DWN

MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on DisĆ play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

MAS-UP

MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

Running Op Switch Test Illustration 3–2 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP SWITCH TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that the test is running. If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display. 3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs . The prompt may not display mAs when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another seĆ lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is funcĆ tioning correctly.

3-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–3 DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

3-3

LOOP TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

Display Controller This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that segments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights. This is a visual test. Illustration 3–3 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP CNTRL TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. 3. Press and hold mAs . When all displays are blank, release the switch. The prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-5



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–4 BATTERY VOLTAGE

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TEST

DISPCNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

3-4

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

Battery Voltage Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of removing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltmeter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage difference is more than 0.2 volts. Illustration 3–4 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP BATRY VOLTS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Each time you press mAs , the battery voltage is sampled and displayed. 3. Press either kVp or kVp to make your next selection from the DiagnosĆ tics Menu. Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other function.

3-6



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–5 LOOP TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

mAs ENTER SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CHTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

DEFINE ADDRESS

–WRITE–

–READ–

DATA

3-5

Loop Test Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running. Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus location can be accessed with this test.

CAUTION

Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 5 will prevent this problem. Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics. Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify the fault. Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the Service Switch up and down will also reset the latches.)

3-7



Illustration 3–5 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select LOOP TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message DisĆ play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enterĆ ing an address, press mAs . The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST. ILLUSTRATION 3–6 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 3–6. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6. Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAsă is pressed to enter the selection, or when mAsă is pressed to change the last value. 3. Change address by first pressing mAsă, then pressing kVp or kVp to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes to -READ- when the last value is changed. 4. Using either kVp or kVp , select -READ- to read the address or -WRITE- to write to the address. 5. Press mAsă at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOPĆ ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data will change if the bit pattern on the port changes. 6. Press mAsă

at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA.

Change data by first pressing mAs two times, then pressing kVp or kVp to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The prompt changes to LOOPING--- when the last value is changed. The address and data apĆ pear on the kVp and mAs display. 7. End the test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicatĆ ing that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

3-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–7 LOOP TEST DISPLAY

Address kVp

Data mAs

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY

ËËË

Increase Value kVp UP

kVp DOWN

Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Decrease Value

3-6

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test continually addresses a port.

3-6-1

Enter Loop Test Illustrations 3–5 and 3–7 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. See Illustration 3–7. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps: 1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posiĆ tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp . 3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSĆ WORD--. 4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS. 5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TEST. 6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp . The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. 7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to DEFINE ADĆ DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You are now ready to use Loop Test.

3-9



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 3–8 READ PORT DISPLAY

Increase Value kVp UP Decrease Value

3-6-2

1000

Data

kVp

mAs

ËËË ËËË

kVp DOWN

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN

Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Read a Port You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the following steps: 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Press kVp and kVp . You haven't selected a character so nothing happens. 3. Select the first character by pressing mAs . 4. Press kVp and kVp to see how the first address character changes, then change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration 3-8. 5. Select the second character by pressing mAsă. Press kVp and kVp to see how the second address character changes then change it to 0. 6. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAsă three times. The prompt changes to -READ-. 7. Press kVp and kVp . The prompt changes between -READ- and -WRITE-. Select -READ- and press mAsă. The prompt changes to -LOOPING-. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs Display. Data may indicate that the Left Stall or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal because the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board. 8.

Press the Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes when any of the switches close. By pressing the switches you should be able to satisfy your self that the port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value disĆ played.

3-10



REV 11 3-6-3

DIRECTION 46-017207 Write Then Read You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex. By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap relays. Select Port 1000 Hex. 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 3-6-1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAsă. 3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp or kVp . 4. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAsă three times. The prompt changes to -READ-. Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3. 5.

Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp or kVpă.

6. Select the first character by pressing mAsă two times. 7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp or kVp , then press mAsă to select the second character. 8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAsă. The relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays. 9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. ReĆ lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset. Re–enter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex. 10. Enter Loop Test. 11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp , kVp , and mAsă. 12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAsă. Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex. Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. You will hear the relays drop out when the data is written to the port.

3-11




3-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 4 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/ 46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 System Diagnostics allows you to display the battery voltage, check for stuck switches, and check blocks of circuitry. ILLUSTRATION 4–1 SYSTEM BLOCK TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TESTS

DISP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

4-1

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

System Block Test System Block Test checks the digital to analog and analog to digital converters. It also checks the tap selection circuitry.To check the D/A and A/D converters, DAC U355 on CPU 46–264974, is set up so that it will send a KVP DMN+ signal to the Filament and kVp Control Board. The signal is received by the Filament and kVp Control Board at J2 pins 11 and 12, schematic location 2–D1. The signal leaves this board unaltered as KVP DMN FBK+ at J2 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 2–E4, and returns to the CPU Board on connector J5 pins 13 and 14, schematic location 5–E1. Analog buffer AR392 on CPU 46–264974 conditions the signal for multiplex U342 on CPU 46–264974. The signal is ultimately read by the processor and compared with the output signal. If they agree the test passes.

4-1



Taps are checked by individuals selecting TAP1* through TAP6* signals at the Generator Control 2 Port, schematic location 4–B9. The six tap signals go to six identical circuits on the 1kHz Driver Board, schematic sheet 2. On the 1kHz Driver Board these signals are converted to 110 volt coil driving signals and tap feed back logic signals. TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK return to the CPU board Generator and AEC Status port, schematic location 3–E7. Tap select and feedback signals are compared. If they agree the test passes. By examining the tap feedback circuit, you can see that a shorted coil or stuck contacts will produce a feedback signal. Keep this in mind when running System Block Test. You should hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected when the tap test is running. If you don’t, and the test passes, check the relays. 4-1-1

Running System Block Test Illustration 4–1 shows Block Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select SYS BLOCK TESTS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the SYS BLOCK TESTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. The prompt changes to ANALOG TEST, then to TAP TEST. If the test passes, PASS appears after the prompt, if the test fails FAIL appears after the prompt. When Tap Test runs, you should hear seven equally spaced clicks of the relays being selected. 3. End System Block Tests by Pressing and holding mAs until the display goes blank and the test stops. Release mAs . The test makes one last check, then the prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TESTS indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–2 SWITCH TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

4-2

LOOP TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

Op Switch Test Op Switch looks for closed switches. When a closed switch is found, its name appears on the message display. If all switches are open the display prompts with NOSWITCH PRESSED. When more than one switch is pressed, they display tone after the other. Following is a list of switches checked, their signal names, and CPU Schematic locations: EXPOSE

EXP SW J8- pin 23 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1.

PREP

PREP SW J8 pin 25 sheet 3 location B-7, supplied from HAND SW COM J8 pin 24 sheet 3 location F-1.

FIELD LIGHT

FIELD LIGHT SW and FIELD LIGHT SW RTN Collimator connection J3 pins 17 and 18, Hand Switch connections J8 pins 21 and 24 sheet 3 location F-1. Collimator loop passes through Rotor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.

DRIVE ENABLE

DRIVE ENA SW and DRIVE ENA SW RTN J8 pins 27 and 28 sheet 3 location D-1.

TUBE PARKED

TUBE PARKED SW and TUBE PARKED SW RTN J8 pins 13 and 14 sheet 3 location C-1

RUN

SERVICE SW and SERVICE SW RTN J8, 10 and 20 on sheet 4 location H-6.

HIGH TUBE PRESS

X-RAY PRESS SW and X-RAY PRESS SW RTN J3 pins 6 and 7 sheet 3 location C-8. This signal passes through RoĆ tor Control Board AMX 1 A3 A2 sheet 2.

BUMPER

BUMPER* J2 pin 10 then to Drive Control Board AMX1 A5 A1 J11 pins 1 and 2 sheet 4 location E-1.

CHARGING CORD

LINE SENSE J1 pin 6 on sheet 3 location A-1.

KVP-UP

KVP UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

4-3



REV 11

4-2-1

DIRECTION 46-017207 KVP-DWN

KVP DOWN J6 pin 13 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

MAS-DWN

MAS DOWN J6 pin 7 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on DisĆ play Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

MAS-UP

MAS UP J6 pin 5 sheet 3 location F-1. Switch is on Display Board AMX1 A1 A2 sheet 1 location F2

Running Op Switch Test Illustration 4–2 shows OP Switch selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select OP SWITCH TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the OP SWITCH TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to NOSWITCH PRESSED indicating that the test is running. If a switch is closed, the name of the switch appears on the message display. 3. End the Op Switch Test by Pressing mAs . The prompt may not display mAs when pressed but change to OP SWITCH TEST indicating that another seĆ lection may be made from the Diagnostics menu and that the mAs switch is funcĆ tioning correctly.

4-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–3 DISPLAY CONTROLLER TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TESTS

DSP CNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

4-3

LOOP TEST

DSP BATRY VOLTS

Display Controller This test checks the Display Controller Module. Each display is checked to see that segments are not shorted, then they are checked to see that each segment lights. Illustration 4–3 shows Display Controller Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP CNTRL TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP CNTRL TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The test starts to run. 3. Press and hold mAs . When all displays are blank, release the switch. The prompt changes to DISP CNTRL TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-5



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–4 BATTERY VOLTAGE

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT


SYS BLOCK TEST

DISPCNTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

4-4

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

Battery Voltage Battery Voltage displays on the kVp and mAs Display. This may be used instead of removing covers to check battery voltage. The displayed voltage should match the actual voltage within +0.2 volts. Correct the display by using the calibration procedure Calibrate Voltmeter. Generator calibration must be done after calibrating the volt meter, if the voltage difference is more than 0.2 volts. Illustration 4–4 shows Battery Voltage selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DISP BATRY VOLTS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DISP BATRY VOLTS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to BATTERY VOLTS, and Battery voltage appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Each time you press mAs , the battery voltage is sampled and displayed. 3. Press either kVp or kVp to make your next selection from the DiagnosĆ tics Menu. Battery voltage stays on the display until the display controller is reset by some other function.

4-6



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–5 LOOP TEST

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

mAs ENTER SYS BLOCK TEST

DISP CHTRL TEST

OP SWITCH TEST

LOOP TEST

DISP BATRY VOLTS

DEFINE ADDRESS

SELECT HEXADECIMAL OR BINARY FORMAT

–WRITE–

–READ–

DATA

4-5

Loop Test Loop Test continuously reads a selected address, or writes data that you specify to a selected address. The prompt LOOPING appears on the Message Display while the test is running. Data being read or written appears on the kVp and mAs Display. Any CPU address bus location can be accessed with this test.

CAUTION

Writing to RAM can corrupt the Calibration Data Base, producing a Check Sum Error. Calibration is required if this occurs. Limiting your use of Loop Test to the I/O ports listed in Section 4 will prevent this problem. Loop Test can be used to check circuits that are not tested by other portions of diagnostics. Command signals may be set, and feedback checked to see if circuits are functioning. You may use Loop Test for signal tracing by setting selected signals to a known state. When a potential fault is discovered, Loop Test may be used to set the signal high and low to verify the fault. Exit Diagnostics and turn the AMX OFF when you finish using Loop Test. This resets the system and makes sure the CPU Port Latches are properly set for other tests. (Setting the Service Switch up, and then down will also reset the latches.)

4-7



Illustration 4–5 shows Loop Test selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Use the following steps to select LOOP TEST. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the LOOP TEST menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt DEFINE ADDRESS appears on the Message DisĆ play, and an address appears on the kVp and mAs Display. To exit without enterĆ ing an address, press mAs twice. The prompt changes to EXITING------, then to LOOP TEST. ILLUSTRATION 4–6 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

Addresses and data are changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 4–6. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6. Address or Data appearing on the mAs and kVp display is entered when either mAsă is pressed to enter the selection, or when mAsă is pressed to change the last value. 3. Change address by first pressing mAsă, then pressing kVp or kVp to select the proper hexadecimal value. After the required value displays, press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. Note that the digit being changed will flash. 4.

The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alternate on the display. Pressing MAS will display in hexadecimal format. Pressing MAS will display data in a binary format.

5.

The prompt changes to -READ-. Using either kVp or kVp , -READ- to read the address or -WRITE- to write to the address.

select

6. Press mAsă at the prompt -READ- and the prompt changes to LOOPĆ ING---. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Data will change if the bit pattern on the port changes. Only data will appear if binary format is selected. 7. Press mAsă

at the prompt -WRITE- and the prompt changes to DATA.

Change data by first pressing mAs two times, then pressing kVp or kVp to select the proper hexadecimal or binary value. After the required value disĆ plays, press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. The digit will flash. The prompt changes to LOOPING--- when the last value is changed. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Only data will appear if binary format is selected. 8. End the test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST indicating that another selection may be made from the Diagnostics menu.

4-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–7 LOOP TEST DISPLAY Binary Mode

or Hexadecimal Mode Address and

Data

Data

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY

ËËË


kVp DOWN

Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Decrease Value

4-6

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Loop Test. You will see that Loop Test continually addresses a port.

4-6-1

Enter Loop Test Illustrations 4–5 and 4–7 show Loop Test selection. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. See Illustration 4–7. Loop Test prompts appear on the Message Display. Address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Address and data are the Hexadecimal equivalent of a Decimal number. Enter Loop Test by performing the following steps: 1. Enter the Service Mode by placing the service switch up to the application posiĆ tion and turn the unit ON. While Power Up tests are running set the service switch down to the service position. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Display the DIAGNOSIS ITEMS menu selection by Pressing kVp . 3. Enter Diagnostics by pressing mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSĆ WORD--. 4. Enter the password. The prompt changes to SYS DIAGNOSTICS. 5. Enter System Diagnostics by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to SYS BLOCK TEST. 6. Select Loop Test from the System Diagnostics Menu by pressing kVp . The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. 7. Enter Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to DEFINE ADĆ DRESS, and an address 0000 Hex appears on the kVp and mAs display. You are now ready to use Loop Test.

4-9



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 4–8 READ PORT DISPLAY


Decrease Value

4-6-2

1000

Data

kVp

mAs

ËËË ËËË

kVp DOWN

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Read a Port You will read the Charger and Drive Status Port at location 1000 Hex. This port is read by Op Switch Test to display a closed switch. Refer to Section 5-3 Charger and Drive Status for signal identification. By pressing switches you will see that the port is continually being read and the result displayed. Read the Charger and Drive Status Port by performing the following steps: 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 4Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Press kVp and kVp . You haven't selected a character so nothing happens. 3. Select the first character by pressing mAs . 4. Press kVp and kVp to see how the first address character changes, then change it to 1. The address 1000 Hex should display as shown on Illustration 4-8. The digit being changed will flash. 5. Select the second character by pressing mAsă. Press kVp and kVp to see how the second address character changes then change it to 0. 6. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAsă three times. The messages MAS UP for HEX ",MAS DN for BIN" will alterĆ nate on the display. Pressing MAS will display in hexadecimal format. PressĆ ing MAS will display data in a binary format. 7.

The prompt changes to -READ-. Press kVp and kVp . The prompt changes between -READ- and -WRITE-. Select -READ- and press mAsă. The prompt changes to -LOOPING-. The address and data appear on the kVp and mAs Display.

Data may indicate that the Left Stall and/or Right Stall signals are active. This is normal because the processor did not reset the Drive Control Board. 8.

Press Drive Enable Switch, Tube Parked Switch, and Bumper. Data changes when any of switches close. By pressing switches you should be able to satisfy your self that port is continuously read and its Hexadecimal value displayed.

4-10



REV 11 4-6-3

DIRECTION 46-017207 Write Then Read You will activate tap relays by writing to the Generator Control 2 Port located at 1000 Hex. By reading the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex you will see that the relays are active. Refer to Section 5-8 Generator Control 2 and Section 5-7 Generator and AEC Status for signal identification. These two ports are used by Block Test when it checks the tap relays. Select Port 1000 Hex. 1. Enter Loop Test as described in Section 4Ć6Ć1 Enter Loop Test. 2. Select the first character of the port address by pressing mAsă. 3. Change this character to 1 by pressing kVp or kVp . 4. Step past the next two characters and enter the address by pressing mAsă three times. Press mAs for Hexadecimal. Press mAs for Binary. The prompt changes to -READ-. Enter 38 Hex, energizing tap selection relays 1, 2, and 3. 5. Change the prompt to -WRITE- by pressing kVp or kVpă. 6. Select the first character by pressing mAsă two times. 7. Change the first character to 3 by pressing kVp or kVp , then press mAsă to select the second character. 8. Change the second character to 8, then enter the value by pressing mAsă. The relays pull in and the prompt -LOOPING- displays. 9. Exit Loop Test by pressing mAsă. The prompt changes to LOOP TEST. ReĆ lays remain pulled in because the port latch was not reset. Re–enter Loop Test and read the Generator and AEC Status Port at 1600 Hex. 10. Enter Loop Test. 11. Select the Generator and AEC Status Port at location 1600 Hex using kVp , kVp , and mAsă. 12. Read the port by selecting the -READ- prompt and pressing mAsă. Depending on the status of bit 7, AEC EXP EN, the data will either be 07 Hex or 87 Hex. Reset the Generator Control Port by writing 00 Hex to location 1000 Hex. (Setting the Service Switch up and down will also reset the Generator Control Port) You will hear the relays drop out when the data is written to the port.

4-11




4-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 5 I/O PORTS 5-1

Introduction This section contains listings of CPU Port addresses, signal names, and schematic locations. Using Loop Test, you can read from and write to these ports. Tables 5–1 and 5–2 cross reference the read and write port select signals with the hex address, port name, and section where signal descriptions are located. These signals originate at U78 on CPU 46–232828 or U170 on CPU 46–264974 and U139 on CPU 46–232828 or U24 on CPU 46–264974. Signal names appear along the right edge of CPU Schematic page two.

TABLE 5–1 READ PORTS

Signal Name

Address Hex

RDP0* RDP1* RDP2* RDP3* RDP4* RDP5* RDP6*

1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600

Port Name

Section

Charger and Drive Status 5–3 On Board Status 5–4 A/D Converter 5–5 Not Used Operator I/O Status 5–6 Programmable Timer Not Described Generator and AEC Status 5–7

TABLE 5–2 WRITE PORTS

Signal Name

Address Hex

WRP0* WRP1* WRP2* WRP3* WRP4* WRP5* WRP6* WRP7* WRP8* WRP9* WRP10* WRP11* WRP12* WRP13* WRP14* WRP15*

1000 1080 1100 1180 1200 1280 1300 1380 1400 1401 1480 1481 1500 1580 1584 1600 1680 1700 1780

Port Name

Section

Generator Control 2 5–8 Not Used Charger and Drive Control AEC Control 5–10 Generator Control 1 5–11 A/D Control 5–12 Set Backup Time 5–13 On Board Control 5–14 Right Speed Command DAC Left Speed Command DAC Charge Current DAC 5–17 Leakage Compensation DAC Programmable Timer 5–19 Filament Current Demand DAC kVp Demand DAC 5–21 Watchdog Timer 5–22 Not Used Not Used Not Used

5-1

5–9

5–15 5–16 5–18 5–20



REV 11

5-2

DIRECTION 46-017207

Selected Functions This table lists selected functions with their address and data. You may activate these functions by writing the data value to the address listed for the function. When finished, always reset any port that you wrote to by writing 00 Hex to it, or resetting the CPU.

TABLE 5–3 SELECTED FUNCTIONS PORT

Function

Address

Data

Hex Value

Hex Value

60 Hz Clocks Turns on 60 Hz clocks to 60 Hz Inverter.

1200

01

1k Hz Clocks Turns on 1k Hz clocks to the 1k Hz Inverter.

1200

02

2k Hz Clocks Turns on 2k Hz and 16k Hz clocks to the 1k Hz Inverter.

1200

04

Field Light Turns on the Collimator Field Light.

1200

11

2k Hz Filament Inverter Turns on the 2k Hz filament inverter at 4.5 Amps.

1200

15

1000 1200

02 11

1000

04

1100 1480

04 80

Turn the Rotor On First enter Then enter Pull in Safety Contactor Press the PREP switch Charge at 2.5 Amps Plug in charging cord First enter Then enter

5-2



REV 11

5-3

DIRECTION 46-017207

Charger and Drive Status Read only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1–A to 1–D. Port select signal is RDP0*.

TABLE 5–4 CHARGER AND DRIVE STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

LINE SENSE

Logic 1 charger is plugged in to a live socket.

1

OPTION SW 3

Logic 1 selects English prompts. Logic 0 selects French prompts.

2

OPTION SW 4

(Not used)

3

BUMPER

Logic 1 bumper switch is engaged, something was hit.

4

TUBE PARKED SW

Logic 1 x–ray tube arm is locked in place. Logic 0 x–ray tube arm is not locked in place.

5

LEFT STALL

Logic 1 left drive motor has overheated or stalled.

6

RIGHT STALL

Logic 1 right drive motor has overheated or stalled.

7

DRIVE ENA SW

Logic 1 drive enable bar is activated.

5-3



REV 11

5-4

DIRECTION 46-017207

On–Board Status Read only port with address location 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 7–F to 7–H. Port select signal is RDP1*.

TABLE 5–5 ON–BOARD STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

BU TMR OKAY

Logic 1 back–up exposure timer has not timed out

1

EXP CMND STATUS

Indicates the status of the hardware synchronized START EXP CMND signal

2

A/D STATUS

Logic 1 conversion is in progress

3

XMIT OK

Logic 1 sending data to the display without flicker Logic 0 sending data to display causes flicker Note that this bit toggles while displayed. This is a normal condition.

4

DISPLAY OK

Logic 1 display controller is scanning

5

BAUD RATE SW

Logic 1 selects 375k Baud Logic 0 selects 187.5k Baud

6

OPTION SW 1

Logic 1 enable +24, 15V tests Logic 0 disable +24, 15V tests

7

SERVICE SW

**

Do not select for CPU board 46–232828.

**

Logic 1service mode requested

5-4


5-5


A/D Converter Port select signal is RDP2*. Start 8-bit Conversion Read only port with address location 1201 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = “0”,starts an 8–bit conversion (data read in this case is irrelevant). Start 12-bit Conversion Read only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = “0”, starts a 12–bit conversion (data read in this case is irrelevant). Read A/D MSB Read only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = “1”, reads the 8 most significant bits of the A/D output. Read A/D LSB Read only port with address location 1201 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5. Reading from this address with the READ A/D signal = “1”, reads the 4 least significant bits of the 12–bit A/D output followed by the 4 trailing zeroes in the least significant nibble.

5-5



REV 11

5-6

DIRECTION 46-017207

Operator I/O Status Read only port with address location 1400 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 1–D to 1–H. Port select signal is RDP4*.

TABLE 5–6 OPERATOR I/O STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

SER PORT EN

Logic 1 serial port is to be enabled

1

KEY SWITCH ON

Logic 1 key switch is in the ON position.

2

OPTION SW 2

Logic 1 cycles CPU at Power–Up. Logic 0 normal run mode.

3

FIELD LIGHT SW

Logic 1 field light switch is pressed.

4

MAS UP

Logic 1 MAS UP switch is pressed

5

MAS DOWN

Logic 1 MAS DOWN switch is pressed

6

KVP UP

Logic 1 KVP UP switch is pressed

7

KVP DOWN

Logic 1 KVP DOWN switch is pressed.

5-6



REV 11

5-7

DIRECTION 46-017207

Generator and AEC Status Read only port with address location 1600 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5–D to 1–H. Tap feedback signals originate on the 1 kHz driver board. Tap selection is through the Generator Control 2 port. Tap numbers and tap selection relay numbers are the same. Tap 6 and relay K6 should not be active during applications. Port select signal is RDP6*.

TABLE 5–7 GENERATOR AND AEC STATUS PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

TAP 1 FDBK

Logic 1 tap 1 signal was received by the 1khz inverter

1

TAP 2 FDBK


2

TAP 3 FDBK


3

TAP 4 FDBK


4

TAP 5 FDBK


5

TAP 6 FDBK


6

AEC ON

Logic 1 when Automatic Exposure Control is selected. Allows AEC EXP EN to terminate exposure.

7

AEC EXP EN

Logic 1 exposure allowed when AEC ON is active. Logic 0 exposure stops when AEC ON is active. Logic 1 when AEC is not installed.

TABLE 5–8 KVP TAP SELECTION RELAY

HEX

msb–K6 K5

K4

5-7

K3

K2

lsb–K1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

10H 20H 30H

0 1 1

1 0 1

0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0

40H = AEC ON 80H = AEC EXP EN C0H = AEC ON and AEC EXP EN

5-8


5-8


Generator Control 2 Write only port with address location 1000 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 9–B. Port select signal is WRP0*.

TABLE 5–9 GENERATOR CONTROL 2 PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

TAP 6

Logic 1 selects tap relay 6

1

ROTOR SELECT

Logic 1 pulls in a relay which enables current to flow through the stator. If this relay is not pulled in, the field lamp circuit is enabled.

2

SAFETY CONT ENB

Logic 1 pulls in a relay whose contacts pull in the safety contactor which supplies power to the 1 khz inverter. In addition, the prep switch must be depressed in order to pull in the safety contactor.

3

TAP 1


4

TAP 2


5

TAP 3


6

TAP 4


7

TAP 5


5-9



REV 11

5-9

DIRECTION 46-017207

Charger and Drive Control Write only port with address 1100 hex. Schematic location; sheet 4, 11–D to 11–F. Port select signal is WRP2*.

TABLE 5–10 CHARGER AND DRIVE CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

TRIP BREAKER

Logic 1 trips the circuit breaker.

1

CHARGE SCALE–SELECT

Logic 1 sets charger to trickle charge rate. Logic 0 sets charger to full charge rate.

2

CHARGER RELAY

Logic 1 connects isolation transformer to charger.

3

REVERSE ONLY

Logic 1 motion is allowed in reverse only.

4

FULL SPD ENA

Logic 1 enables peak drive speed. Logic 0 limits drive speed.

5

MOTOR ENA

Logic 1 connects the motor drives to the motors and releases the brakes.

6

DRIVE RESET

Logic 1 resets the drive boards.

7

BAT V & CHARGE CUR SEL

Logic 1 selects charge current feedback. Logic 0 selects battery voltage feedback.

5-10



REV 11

5-10

DIRECTION 46-017207

AEC Control Write only port with address location 1180 hex. Schematic location; sheet 3, 5–A. KVP0 to KVP4 gives the selected KVP when prep is entered. Port select signal is WRP3*.

TABLE 5–11 AEC CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

KVP0

1

KVP1

2

KVP2

3

KVP3

4

KVP4

5

KVP5

Not Used

6

KVP6

Not Used

7

GEN READY

Not Used

TABLE 5–12 KVP SELECTION

kVp

HEX

kVp4

kVp3

kVp2

kVp1

kVp0

50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 74 76 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120 125

02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH 10H 11H 12H 13H 15H 15H 16H 17H 18H 19H

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0

1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

5-11



REV 11

5-11

DIRECTION 46-017207

Generator Control 1 Write only port with address location 1200 hex. Schematic location; sheet 6, 7–B. Port select signal is WRP4*.

TABLE 5–13 GENERATOR CONTROL 1 PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

60HZ EN

Logic 1 enables both 60Hz phase 1 and 2 clocks

1

1kHZ EN

Logic 1 enables both 1 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks to the1 kHz inverter

2

2kHz EN

Logic 1 enables both 2 kHz phase 1 and 2 clocks and 16 kHz clock to the Filament control board.

3

LOW RESOLUTION

Logic 1 selects low timer resolution for mAs >=12.5 Logic 0 selects high timer resolution for mAs <12.5

4

60 Hz RELAY

Logic 1 brings power to the 60 Hz Inverter.

5

PREHEAT

Logic 1 turns on filament preheat; boosts the filament

6

START EXP

Logic 1 initiates the exposure hardware synchronizes this signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed <10mS.

7

STOP EXP

Logic 1 terminates the exposure hardware synchronizes this signal to the 1 kHz clock. This signal must be pulsed <10mS.

5-12



REV 11

5-12

DIRECTION 46-017207

A/D Control Write only port with address 1280 hex. Schematic location; sheet 5 6–E. AMUX0 through AMUX3 determine which of 16 possible A/D inputs are selected. See the A/D Input Select table below. Port select signal is WRP5*.

TABLE 5–14 A/D CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME

DESCRIPTION

0

AMUX0

1

AMUX1

2

AMUX2

3

AMUX3

4

spare

5

spare

6

READ A/D

Logic 1 enables A/D output read when the A/D output is read Logic 0 allows an A/D conversion when the A/D output is read

7

HOLD

Logic 1 places the A/D sample and hold device into the hold mode Logic 0 puts it into the sample mode

TABLE 5–15 A/D INPUT SELECT

SELECTED INPUTHEX AMUX3 AMUX2 AMUX0 Spare Spare RGT MAN TDS OUT LFT MAN TDS OUT Spare RIGHT DRV FDBK LEFT DRV FDBK KVP DMN FDBK FIL FDBK LEAKAGE COMP FDBK Spare Spare +40V V.F. DISP SUPPLY SIGNAL GROUND +24V VF SUPPLY +5V LOGIC SUPPLY

00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H 08H 09H 0AH 0BH 0CH 0DH 0EH 0FH

5-13

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

AMUX1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1



REV 11

5-13

DIRECTION 46-017207

Set Back–Up Time Write only port with address location 1300 hex. Port select signal is WRP6*. Schematic location; sheet 6, F–3. Writing to this port just before an exposure sets the back–up time as follows: Back–Up Counts = ((MAS 60) 70 + 5) The actual back–up time is equal to (Back–Up Count 16.67) millisec since the back–up timer is clocked at 60Hz.

5-14

On–Board Control Write only port with address location 1380 hex. Port select signal is WRP7*. Schematic location; sheet 5, 9–B. FREQ FDBK0 and FREQ FDBK1 select which frequency feedback the 80C31 frequency counter looks at. See Frequency Feedback Select table below.

TABLE 5–16 ON–BOARD CONTROL PORT

BIT

SIGNAL NAME 0

UART MUX CNTRL Not used on CPU 46-264974

DESCRIPTION Logic 1 selects spare data as serial output and input Logic 0 selects Display data as serial output and switch data as serial input

1

PWR DOWN RST HOLDOFF

Logic 0 advanced power down signal resets processor Logic 1 holds off the reset.

2

DISP RST

Logic 1 resets the display controller

3

spare

4

spare

5

FREQ FDBK 0

6

FREQ FDBK 1

7

FREQ FDBK 2

TABLE 5–17 FREQUENCY FEEDBACK SELECT

SELECTED FEEDBACK

HEX

mAs from Filament Control PWB Battery Voltage / Charging Current Output 0 from the Programmable Timer Output 1 from the Programmable Timer Output 2 from the Programmable Timer Spare Spare Spare

FDBK 2 00H 01H 02H 03H 04H 05H 06H 07H

5-14

FDBK 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1

FDBK 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1



REV 11

5-15

DIRECTION 46-017207

Right Speed Command DAC Write only port with address location 1400 hex. Port select signal is WRP8*. Schematic location; sheet 4, D–2. The data written to this address is the Right Wheel Speed Command, where: 0 = full forward 127 = zero speed 255 = full reverse

5-16

Left Speed Command DAC Write only port with address location 1401 hex. Port select signal is WRP8*. Schematic location; sheet 4, D–2. The data written to this address is the Left Wheel Speed Command, where: 255 = full forward 127 = zero speed 0 = full reverse

5-17

Charge Current DAC Write only port with location 1480 hex. Port select signal is WRP9*. Schematic location; Sheet 4, F–2. Data written to this address controls the Charging Current. When the TRICKLE CHARGE bit is set to “0”, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 5 Amps of charge current. With TRICKLE CHARGE set to “1”, 0 to 255 gives 0 to 0.5 Amps of charge current. This DAC also is used in the DRIVE mode to check the integrity of the Handle Circuitry. 255 – enables handle transducer signal. 0 – forces the handle signal to 0.6V (diode drop).

5-18

Leakage Current Compensation DAC Write only port with address location 1481 hex. Port select signal is WRP9*. Schematic location; sheet 4, F–2. Data written to this address is the Leakage Current Compensation.

5-19

Programmable Timer Writing to the following addresses controls the timer as listed below. Port select signal is WRP10*. Schematic location; sheet 6, D–6. Note that access to this timer occurs only during system initialization. ADDRESS 1500H 1501H 1502H 1503H

DESCRIPTION

Writes data to counter 0 Writes data to counter 1 Writes data to counter 2 Writes data to the Control Word Register

5-15


5-20


Filament Current Demand DAC Write only port with the following address locations; 1580H low nibble, 1581 medium nibble, 1582H high nibble, 1583H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B–2. Data written to this address is the Filament Current Demand. 0H = filament current of approximately 4.5A and 4096H = filament current of approximately 5.5A

5-21

KVP Demand DAC Write only port with the following address locations; 1584H low nibble, 1585H middle nibble, 1586H high nibble, 1587H control (load command) nibble. Port select signal is WRP11*. Schematic location; sheet 4, B–2. Data written to this address is the kVp Demand. 0H = 0kVp and 4095H = 145kVp

5-22

Watchdog Timer Write only port with address location 1600 hex. Port select signal is WRP12*. Schematic location; sheet 2, E–2. Writing to this port retriggers the watchdog timer. Data is irrelevant. This port must be written to once every 30ms or the watchdog will timeout.

5-23

Variables Unique To PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 and 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 52DH–52EH 544H 546H 547H 548H–549H

Monitor_zero_cap_millivolts Recycle time No_trickle_counter Trickle_lmt No_trickle–counter_mem

5-16

Corresponds to 0% on bar graph Time between charge cycles # of times since last full charge # of cutoff cycles before full charge total # of charge cycles



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ATTENTION

5-24

Sections 5-24, 5-25, 5-26 and 5-27 cover AMX-4 Units with: Proms 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later, and CPU Board 46-264974.

kVp/mAs Display After Exposure Note:

This function interacts with Section 5Ć26 function below since they share the same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time. If the customer would want to inhibit the feature that stops the kVp/mAs display from flashing after exposure, then do as follows: Load – Location C98 hex with 79H Load – Location C99 hex with 63H To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 7963H (e.g., 0000H).

5-25

Critical Status Read only port internal to the 8031. Use address FFFF to read this port. Bit 0 – Prep switch Bit 1 – Exp Switch Bit 2 – Tube Pressure Switch Bit 3 – 60Hz OK Bit 4 – Rotor Bit 5 – 1 kHz RDY Bit 6 – Fil Shorted

5-26

Force the Use of 137 kV in Tapcal Note:

This is for reference only. This would not normally be done.

Note:

This function interacts with Section 5Ć24 function above since they share the same address location. Only one of these functions can be used at a time. The new code allows Tapcal below 137 kV at low battery voltages. Loading these locations will force the use of 137 kV as in previous code. Load location C98 hex with 8AH Load location C99 hex with 74H To place the system back to normal, load these locations with something other than 8A74H (e.g., 0000H).

5-27

Force an Extended Charge Cycle Loading this location will force an extended charge cycle. (Refer to Section 13–13.) Load location CA5 hex with 15H This extended charge cycle is transparent to the user. 5-17



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 6 DATA LOG ILLUSTRATION 6–1 DATA LOG

6-1

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Data Log maintains a history of AMX–4 operation. As shown on Illustration 6–1 there are three Data Log functions: VIEW DATA LOG INIT DATA LOG LOAD DATA LOG

6-2

Enter Data Log Illustration 6–1 shows Data Log selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Exit Data Log by pressing mAsă at any of the three Data Log function prompts listed above. The prompt changes to DATA LOG, indicating that Data Log is closed and another selection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu.

ILLUSTRATION 6–2 DATA LOG DISPLAY HEX VALUE kVp

ËËËË ËËËË

Increase Value kVp UP Decrease Value

mAs

kVp DOWN

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts

mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN

Enter Value or Shift Data Entry

Refer to Illustration 6–2. Data Log items appear on the Message Display directly above the kVp and mAs switches. Values appearing on the kVp and mAs display are a Hexadecimal equivalent of the Decimal number. Numbers are valid only if Data Log has been initialized. Following is a sequential listing of Data Log items:

6-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 For Proms 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 or 46–303272G1/46–303273G1:

MON MODE TIMER – software monitor on time in minutes.

DRIVE MODE TIMER – drive time in minutes.

CHARGE MODE TIMER – charging time in hours.

X-RAY MODE TIMER – prep and expose time in seconds.

TTL ON-TIME TMR – total on time in hours.

NUM EQALIZ CYCLE – number of complete equalization cycles. (Appears but is not used.)

NUM CHARGE CYCLE – number of complete charge cycles.

TOTL AMP HR CHRG – amount of charge returned to batteries.

AHR SINCE EQALIZ – amount of charge returned to battery since last complete equalization cycle. (Appears but is not used.)

EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures.

ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules.

EXP TIME METER – exposure on time in milliseconds.

6-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 For Proms 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later:

6-2-1

MON MODE TIMER – software monitor on time in hours.

DRIVE MODE TIMER – drive time in minutes.

CHARGE MODE TIMER – charging time in hours.

X-RAY MODE TIMER – prep and expose time in seconds.

TTL ON-TIME TMR – total on time in hours.

HIGH CHG TIMER - high charge time in hours.

NUM CHARGE CYCLE – number of complete charge cycles.

TOTL AMP HR CHRG – amount of charge returned to batteries.

NUM CHG INIT – number charge cycles initiated.

EXPOSURE COUNTER - number of exposures.

ENERGY METER - applied energy in Joules.

EXP TIME METER – exposure on time in milliseconds.

Enter View Data Log Display Data Log Items and there values. kVp

kVp

VIEW DATA LOG

mAs MON MODE TIMER kVp kVp mAs EXITING------VIEW DATA LOGindicating that the data log viewing is closed and another selection may be made from the data log menu.

6-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 6-2-2


Enter Initialize Data Log Set all data log elements to zero. Initializing the Data Log at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating parameters can be followed. INT DATA LOG. kVp

kVp

INT DATA LOG

mAs The prompt goes blank, then changes to INT DATA LOG, indicating that Initialize Data Log is closed and another selection may be made from the Data Log menu. 6-3

Load Data Log Set the value of a data log element. This is necessary if the X–Ray Tube or batteries are replaced. (If the X–ray tube is replaced, load zeros in the exposure counter and there is no need to initialize the Data Log). kVp

kVp

LOAD DATA LOG

mAs MON MODE TIMER kVp

kVp

mAsă kVp kVp mAsăkVp kVp The number of digits varies from one item to the next. Repeat this process until the value has been entered. mAsăEXITING------LOAD DATA LOG

6-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 7 ERROR LOG ILLUSTRATION 7–1 ERROR LOG


kVp PREVIOUS


END SERVC MODE

PASSWORD REQUIRED

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

mAs ENTER DATA LOG

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

ERROR LIST

7-1

CHARGER

ERROR LOG

HISTOGRAMS

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Error Log maintains an error occurrence history which can be helpful when diagnosing problems. Calibration errors, and errors encountered when entering Diagnostics are not recorded. As shown on Illustration 7–1 there are two Error Log functions: 1.

ERROR LIST

the order in which errors occurred.

2.

HISTOGRAMS

the number of times an error occurred.

Both the Error List and Histograms can be initialized, setting all data to zero, to establish a starting point from which errors can be monitored. Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed.

7-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 7–2 ERROR LOG DISPLAY

ERROR CODE HEXADECIMAL

00

000

kVp

mAs

NUMBER OF OCCURRENCES DECIMAL kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

ËËËË ËËËË

Display Next kVp UP Error Display kVp Previous DOWN Error

7-2


mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter

Entering Error Log Illustration 7–2 shows Error Log selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. The prompt ERROR LIST displays when you are in Error Log. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. Exit Error Log by pressing mAsă at either of the Error Log function prompts. The prompt changes to ERROR LOG, indicating that Error Log is closed and another seĆ lection may be made from the Diagnostics Menu. Error log prompts appear on the Message Display directly above the kVp and mAs switches. Error Codes and the number of times they occurred appear on the kVp and mAs Display. Errors display as Hexadecimal numbers, while the occurrence is a decimal number.

7-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 7–3 ERROR LIST ERROR LOG

kVp

mAs ENTER

ERROR LIST

TOGGLE

HISTOGRAMS

kVp TOGGLE VIEW ERROR LIST

7-2-1

INIT ERROR LIST

VIEW HISTOGRAMS

INIT HISTOGRAMS

View Error List Error List tells you the order in which errors have occurred. It has room for 256 errors. The first error to display when viewing the error list is the first error which occurred. This is the oldest error listed. The most recent error is at the end of the list. Each time an error occurs it is logged at the end of the error list. If an error occurs 20 times in secession, it’s code will occupy 20 consecutive spaces. This appears as if there is no response to stepping up or down through the list. You must count the number of steps to determine the number of occurrences. Illustration 7–3 shows Error List selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use the following procedure to view the Error List: 1. Press kVp

until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST. 3. Press mAs . The prompt changes to START OF LIST. Press kVp , and the earliest error code number appears on the kVp and mAs display. If the list is empty the prompt LIST IS EMPTY displays followed by VIEW ERROR LIST. 4. Pressing

and holding kVp or kVp

scrolls to end or start of list.

5. Pressing kVp displays the next error. The prompt END OF LIST displays momentarily when the end of the list is reached. 6. Pressing kVp

displays the previous error.

7. Press mAs . The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW ERĆ ROR LIST indicating that the error list viewing is closed. 8. Pressing mAs . The display changes to ERROR LIST indicating that the Error List is closed.

7-3

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 7-2-2


Initialize Error List Initializing the Error List empties the error buffer. This provides a starting point from which errors may be tracked. Initializing the error list at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed. Illustration 7–3 shows Error List selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use the following procedure to initialize the Error List: 1. Press kVp

until the ERROR LIST prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW ERROR LIST. 3. Press kVp . The prompt changes to INIT ERROR LIST. 4. Press mAs . The prompt goes blank, then INIT ERROR LIST redisplays, indiĆ cating that the error list has been initialized. 5. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LIST. 6. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the Error List is closed.

7-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 7–4 HISTOGRAM ERROR LOG

mAs ENTER

kVp ERROR LIST

TOGGLE

HISTOGRAMS

kVp TOGGLE VIEW ERROR LIST

7-3

INIT ERROR LIST

VIEW HISTOGRAMS

INIT HISTOGRAMS

View Histograms Histogram tells you the number of times an error occurred. It is arranged in error code order. Each time an error occurs it is logged in the Histogram. If an error has not occurred, the error code will not display. Histogram displays the hexadecimal error code number above kVp and the number of occurrences as a decimal number above mAs. Illustration 7–4 shows Histogram selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use the following procedure to view the Error List: 1. Press kVp

until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 3. Press mAs . 00ăă000 appears on the kVp and mAs display. 4. Pressing kVp displays the next error. If the list is empty the prompt HISTO LIST EMPTY displays followed by VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 5. Pressing kVp

displays the previous error.

6. Press mAs . The display changes to EXITING------, then to VIEW HISĆ TOGRAMS indicating that Histogram viewing is closed. 7. Pressing mAs . The display changes to HISTOGRAMS indicating that the Histograms is closed.

7-5

PROPRIETARY TO GENERAL ELECTRIC COMPANY REV 11 7-4


Initialize Histograms Initializing Histograms empties it’s buffer. This provides a starting point from which you may track errors. Initializing Histograms at installation, just before turning the unit over, provides a clean buffer from which operating errors can be followed. Illustration 7–4 shows Histogram selection using the kVp and mAsă switches. Use the following procedure to initialize the Error List: 1. Press kVp

until the HISTOGRAMS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to VIEW HISTOGRAMS. 3. Press kVp . The prompt changes to INIT HISTOGRAMS. 4. Press mAs . The prompt goes blank, then INIT HISTOGRAMS redisplays, indicating that the Histogram list has been initialized. 5. Press mAs . The display changes to HISTOGRAMS. 6. Press mAs . The display changes to ERROR LOG indicating that the HistoĆ grams is closed.

7-6



REV 11 7-5

DIRECTION 46-017207 Error List Table 7–1 is a complete cross reference of error code numbers to error names. Refer to Table 12–1 Power Up Error Codes, and Table 12–3 Applications Error Codes for the probable cause of the error and recommended service actions. Random RAM patterns appearing to be Error Codes other than those listed in Table 7–1 occur when the CPU Board or RAM are replaced. Prevent confusion this misinformation causes by initializing Error List and Histograms at installation and whenever the CPU Board or RAM are replaced.

TABLE 7–1 ERROR CODE TO ERROR NAME CROSS REFERENCE

Error Code

Error Error Name Code (On Operator Display)

Error Name

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Error 101 Error 102 Error 103 Error 104 Error 105 Error 106 Error 107 Error 210 Error 211 Left Drive Stall Right Drive Stall Error 214 Error 215 Error 216 Error 217 Error 218 RELEASE HANDLE Error 320 Error 321 Error 322 Display Error 23

43 44 45 50 53 54 56 57 58 59 5A 5B 5C 5D 5E 5F 60 61 62 63 65

26 2F 30 31 32 33 35 36 37 39 3A 3B 3D 3E

Error 326 Error 42F Error 430 Error 431 Error 432 Error 433 Error 435 Error 436 Error 437 Error 439 Error 43A Error 43B Error 43D Error 43E (displayed after 100 occurrences)

66 67 68 69 70 81 82 83 84 85 86 87

7-7

Error 443 Battery Too High Battery Too Low Error 450 Error 453 Error 454 Error 456 Error 457 Error 458 Error 459 Error 45A Error 45B Error 45C Error 45D Error 45E Error 45F Error 460 Error 461 Error 462 Error 463 Error 465(displayed after 100 occurrences) Error 466 Error 467 Error 468 Error 469 Halting Error 70 Test - 01 Failed Test - 02 Failed Test - 03 Failed Test - 04 Failed Test - 05 Failed Test - 06 Failed Test - 07 Failed




7-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 8 CHARGER ILLUSTRATION 8–1 CHARGER


kVp PREVIOUS


END SERVC MODE

kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS

PASSWORD REQUIRED mAs ENTER

SYS DIAGNOSTICS

8-1

DATA LOG

ERROR LOG

CHARGE BATTERYS

Introduction To enter the Diagnostics Program, refer to Section 2 Entering Diagnostics. Charger provides a means by which the batteries may be charged when the AMX is not completely calibrated. The Voltmeter and Charger MUST be calibrated before this procedure is used. Other calibration procedures may be delayed until batteries are charged. Charging by this method is identical to charging in the Applications Mode.

CAUTION

Battery damage may occur if Charger is used when the Voltmeter and Charger are not properly calibrated

8-1



REV 11 8-2

DIRECTION 46-017207 Entering Charger Illustration 8–2 shows Charger selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrate the selection path. The prompt PLUG IN CHARGER displays when you are in Charger. Exit Charger at the prompt PLUG IN CHARGER by turning the key switch off.

ILLUSTRATION 8–2 CHARGE BATTERIES

ËËË ËËË

kVp UP

kVp DOWN

1. Press kVp


mAs UP mAs DOWN Enter

until the CHARGE BATTERYS prompt appears.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to PLUG IN CHARGER. 3. Plug the charging cord into a convenience outlet. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 4. Set the Service Switch to the Run position. The prompt changes to CHARGING. Turn the key switch to the OFF position. 5. Unplug charger when CHARGE COMPLETE prompt displays. The CHARGING prompt appears on the Message Display and the % of charge display is lit and functioning. This method of charging is identical to charging in the Applications Mode, however, the bargraph will not update in this mode. It is recommended the voltmeter be recalibrated after charging to reset the bargraph to the actual voltage.

8-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 9 DATA BASE ACCESS

WARNING

9-1

ENTERING IMPROPER DATA CAN SUBJECT THE PATIENT AND OPĆ ERATOR TO EXCESSIVE RADIATION OR IT CAN DAMAGE THE XRAY TUBE. IT MAY CAUSE UNEXPECTED DRIVE RESPONSE WHICH CAN INJURE THE OPERATOR AND OTHERS. KNOW WHAT RESULTS TO EXPECT BEFORE CHANGING DATA VALUES. TEST YOUR CHANGES TO MAKE SURE THEY ARE CORRECT.

Introduction Data Base Access provides direct access to the calibration and configuration data base. Data may be checked to see that it is within specified values, and it may be altered to optimize operation. Always record the address and data before making changes so you can return to where you started. Always test your changes to make sure they are correct. Be very careful when altering data. It is possible to enter data that will make the AMX–4 operate improperly, causing damage to the unit, injuring a patient, or when attempting to drive the unit, injuring the operator and pedestrians.

ILLUSTRATION 9–1 SERVICE SWITCH LOCATION KEY SWITCH

ÉÉ É SERVICE SWITCH IN LEFT SIDE

9-2

Entering Data Base Access Before using Data Base Access you must start the Service Program, not the Diagnostics Program. To start the service program, perform the following steps: 1. Set the service switch shown on Illustration 9-1 down to the service position. 2. Reset the AMX-4 using one of the following methods.

If power is off, turn the Key Switch to the ON position.

If power is on and the top cover is installed, turn the power key OFF for two seconds and then back ON again.

9-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

If power is on and the top cover is removed providing access to the processor board, press the processor reset switch (AMX1 A2 A1 S183 for CPU Board 46–264974, or AMX1 A2 A1 S29 for CPU Board 46–232828).

When the service program is ready the END SERVCăMODE menu selection appears on the Message Display. ILLUSTRATION 9–2 DATA BASE MENU SELECTION

SERVICE PROGRAM kVp NEXT

kVp PREVIOUS mAs ENTER END SERVC MODE

DATA BASE ACCESS

CALIBRATE SYSTEM

After END SERVC MODE appears on the display, you must reach the DATA BASE ACĆ CESS menu selection. Illustration 9–2 shows Data Base Access selection using the kVp , kVp , and mAsă switches. Shaded boxes illustrates the selection path. Use the following steps to select DATA BASE ACCESS. 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the DATA BASE ACCESS menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD-- indicating that Data Base Access may be entered. 9-2-1

Entering Password Enter password. If password is not available, contact Service Engineering. After the password is entered, a hexadecimal address and data value appear on the kVp and mAs display. When an invalid password is entered, the display changes to INVALID ENTRY followed by PLEAS TRY AGAIN, then to DATA BASE ACCESS. Press mAs to re–enter Data Base Access. If the password is not available, press mAsĂ until the prompt INVALID ENTRY appears. The processor halts after three invalid entry attempts. Reset the processor by turning the power off.

9-2



REV 11

9-2-2

DIRECTION 46-017207

Exit Without Changes To exit DATA BASE ACCESS press mAsĂ when one of the menu selections shown on Illustration 9–2 displays. The prompt changes to EXITING------ then to DATA BASE ACCESS indicating that DATA BASE ACCESS is not active. To return to the applications program, perform the following steps: 1. Press either kVp or kVp until the END SERVICE MODE menu selection appears. 2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the service switch up to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. Turn the power key OFF for 2 seconds, then back ON again. 4. Check all functions you worked on to make sure they operate correctly.

ILLUSTRATION 9–3 DATA BASE DISPLAY Address

Data

kVp

mAs kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

ËËËË Increase Value

Decrease Value

9-3

kVp UP

kVp DOWN

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts And Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value Or Shift Data Entry

Data Base Display After entering Data Base Access, a hexadecimal address and data value displays on the kVp and mAs display as shown on Illustration 9–3. Data values display as either a two digit or a four digit hexadecimal number. Data Base address locations are sequential hexadecimal numbers. Section 10 Data Base for AMX–4 Units with: PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 or 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 and CPU Boards 46–232828 or 46–264974, or Section 11 Data Base for AMX–4 Units with: PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1, or 46–329187G1/ 46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/ 46–329188G2 and CPU Board 46–264974 contain a complete data base listing.

9-3


9-4


Selecting Data Base Address See Illustration 9–3. Pressing kVp increases the address location and pressing kVp decreases the address location. You may scroll the address by pressing and holding the switch, or change one location at a time by pressing and releasing the switch. When you reach the address location of the data you wish to change, press mAsă. The address display turns off leaving only data on the kVp and mAs display. To exit the address location without changing data, press mAsă.

9-5

Changing Data Base Values Data is changed starting with the left, or most significant, hexadecimal character and moving right to the least significant character. Change data by using kVp and kVp to select the proper hexadecimal value, then press mAsă to enter the value and move to the next character. (On units with Proms 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later on Board CPU 46–264974, the selected digit will flash.) Data displayed on the mAs and kVp display is entered into the data base either when mAsă is pressed to exit the address, or when mAsă is pressed to enter the last value. The address and new data appears on the kVp and mAs display after entering data.

9-6

Check Sum and Limit Errors You can always read Data Base Access. However, you can write only to areas containing a valid check sum. The area where the check sum error occurred must be re–calibrated before access is allowed. Why? A new check sum must be calculated every time data changes. If you change the wrong value you could damage the AMX–4, or leave it in a non–compliant condition. A Limit Error occurs when a value is entered that is above or below preset limits. A limit error prompt occurs after out of range data is entered. What happens? The data you entered is compared with it’s upper and lower limits. If it is outside of the limit, the original value is placed in the data base instead of the value you entered.

9-7

Demonstration Procedure During this demonstration you will learn to operate Data Base Access. You will also see the relationship between Calibration and Configuration Data Base. First, you will enter out of range data to see the response to a limit error. Then you will use Data Base Access to change data and test the change. Finally, you will change data using Calibration, test the change and verify the change using Data Base Access. Let’s look at an example of Data Base Access. Field light on time is used for this demonstration because it presents the fewest problems if things go wrong. If a problem should arise as you try this example, simply enter calibration and reset the field light on time.

9-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 9–4 HEXADECIMAL REPRESENTATION

9-7-1

Enter Data Base Access 1. Place the service switch in the service position (down) and turn the power on. After completing power up diagnostics, the display changes to END SERVC MODE. 2. Press kVp to display the prompt DATA BASE ACCESS, then press mAsă. The prompt changes to ENTER PASSWORD--. 3. Enter the password. An address and data appear on the kVp and mAs display. Press kVp , then kVp to see how the address changes. Pressing and holding the button scrolls the display. Notice the difference between hexadecimal B and 6 as shown on Illustration 9-4. It is easy to mistake a B for a 6.

ILLUSTRATION 9–5 FIELD LIGHT ON–TIME DISPLAY

1BB kVp

kVp UP

kVp DOWN

9-5

kVp AND mAs DISPLAY

mAs

ËËËË

Increase Value

Decrease Value

2E

MESSAGE DISPLAY Prompts and Errors mAs UP Exit mAs DOWN Enter Value or Shift Data Entry


9-7-2


Change Field Light On–Time Change the Field Light On–Time to more than 45 seconds. Because one bit equals one second, this location must be set to 2E Hex or higher to exceed the maximum value. Refer to Table 9–1, Field Light On–Time Values.

CAUTION

Entering the specified data in a location other than address 1BB could damĆ age the AMX-4. Make sure the address is correct before entering data. 1. Select the Field Light On-Time address 1BB shown on Illustration 9-5. This address is very near the end of the data base. Press kVp to scroll from the top of the data base to the bottom. Press mAsă when address 1BB displays. The address disappears from the kVp and mAs display, leaving the two data characĆ ters. Record this Hex value in the margin so you can return to this setting later. 2. Press kVp , then kVp change this character to 2.

to see how the first data character changes, then

Notice that characters will not scroll, they change when the switch is released. 3. Press mAsă setting the first character to 2 and allowing the second character to be changed. Press kVp , then kVp to see how the second data character changes, then change this character to E. 4. Press mAsă. The prompt changes to FLDLT BYT LIMIT. Press mAsă. The prompt changes to OLD VALUE RESTRD. What happened? The value you entered was higher than the maximum value, so the program returned (restored) the original value to the data base. 5. Enter the hex value 2D in address location 1BB. This corresponds to a lamp ontime of 45 seconds. 9-7-3

Test Change By going to the application program you will see the changes introduced by entering your data. 1. Exit the Service Program by pressing kVp or kVp until the prompt END SERVC MODE appears. 2. Press mAsă. The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the Service Switch to the run position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. 4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed. 5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 45 seconds. Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.

9-6


9-7-4


Enter Calibration Enter calibration and check the Field Light On–Time to check the value. 1. Turn the Power Key Switch to OFF. Set the Service Switch to the service posiĆ tion. Turn the Power Key Switch to the ON position. 2. Press kVp to display the prompt CALIBRATE SYSTEM, then press mAsă. The prompt changes to CAL DRIVE HANDLE. 3. Press kVp until the prompt CAL FLD LT TIME appears, then press mAsă. The prompt changes to ENTER VALUE indicating that Field Light On-Time has been entered. The Field Light On-Time of 045.00 appears on the kVp and mAs Display.

9-7-5

Change Field Light On–Time Now, while still in the calibration mode, change the Field Light On–Time to 15 seconds. This is represented by 0F Hex in the data base. 1. Select 15 second on-time by holding the switch down to scroll the values.

Pressing kVp

increases on–time in 0.1 second increments.

Pressing kVp

decreases on–time in 0.1 second increments.

2. Press mAs when 15 appears. The prompt changes to CAL FLD LT TIME. 3. Press mAs . The prompt changes to CALIBRATE SYSTEM. The display shows tenths of a second, but only seconds are saved. If a value greater than 45 seconds or less than 5 seconds is entered, the error FLDLT BYTE LIMT displays until mAs is pressed, then FLDLIT TIME LIMT is displayed. The Field Light On–Time is set to the limit that was exceeded. Press mAs again to exit. 9-7-6

Test Change Again By going to the application program you will see that the collimator light will stay on for 15 seconds. 1. Press kVp

until the prompt END SERVC MODE displays.

2. Press mAs . The prompt changes to SWITCH TO RUN. 3. Set the Service Switch up to the application position. The prompt changes to CYCLE KEY SWITCH. 4. Turn the Power Key Switch off, then back on. Power-up test is performed. 5. Press the collimator light button. The collimator light will stay on for 15 seconds. Accurate timing is not important for this demonstration.

9-7



REV 11

9-7-7

DIRECTION 46-017207

Enter Data Base Access Enter Data Base Access to verify the 15 second change. The address 1BB and data 0F appear on the kVp and mAs display indicating that the Field Light on Time is set to 15 seconds.

TABLE 9–1 FIELD LIGHT ON–TIME VALUES ON–TIME

9-7-8

HEX VALUE

ON–TIME

HEX VALUE

ON–TIME

HEX VALUE

5

05

20

14

35

23

10

0A

25

19

40

28

15

0F

30

1E

45

2D

On Your Own You have used Data Base Access to change a calibration value. Then you tested the change and you saw the result of entering out of range data. Table 9–1 contains some Field Light On–Times in seconds and the Data Base hexadecimal values. Enter some of these values to see that valid data is accepted. Test your changes to see that values from 5 seconds, 05 Hex, to 45 seconds, 2D Hex, are accepted. You may enter a value that is less than 5 seconds to see that it produces the same results that too long a time produced. By now you can see that as long as the Data Base Value is within it’s minimum and maximum range, the program will accept it. You have seen that you can do no damage with Field Light On–Time. With other parts of the data base this is not the case. Improper values can destroy the batteries or X–Ray Tube and most every thing in between. Don’t be afraid of using Data Base Access. But when you use it, use it carefully.

9-7-9

Return The Original Value Enter the original hexadecimal value that you wrote in the margin in Section 9-7-2, Change Field Light On–Time. Test the unit to make sure it is operating properly before leaving.

9-8

Floor Scuffing Some units leave marks on the floor when accelerating. Reducing the Acceleration Factor reduces this problem. Refer to Acceleration Factor (address 01 6A) in Table 10–6, Drive Parameters, or Table 11–5, Drive Parameters (whichever is appropriate for PROMS in this unit), and experiment with the value until the scuffing is reduced. After the data change, be sure to recalibrate the drive handle.

9-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 10 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 OR 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND CPU BOARDS 46–232828 OR 46–264974 10-1

Calibratible X–Ray Parameters This section contains a complete listing of the AMX–4 Data Base.

TABLE 10–1 CALIBRATIBLE X–RAY PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

99

C8

64

00 01

14

1E

0A

00 02

1E

28

0A

00 03

5A

78

3C

00 04

0A

10

00

00 05

00

64

00

X–RAY BYTES Counts Per mAs00 00 This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The

number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of X–ray emission. Battery Recovery Time

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will be displayed after an exposure. This is the time it takes the batteries to recover after an exposure so that technique accuracy can be guaranteed. Max Prep to Exposure Time

The maximum time in seconds that the unit can remain in “prep” before an exit is forced. Initial Heat Wait Time

The maximum heat wait time in seconds required after an exposure. Max Filament Current Change

The maximum number of DAC counts the Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table Elements can change after most exposures. Used only during auto calibration. Leakage Current at 50 kVp

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 50kVp to give proper leakage compensation.

10-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 10–1 (CONT.) CALIBRATIBLE X–RAY PARAMETERS

Data

Leakage Current at 80 kVp

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 06

0A

C8

00

00 07

21

FA

0A

00 08

12

1B

10

00 09

FF

FF

00

00 0A

FF

FF

00

00 0F

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 80kVp to give proper leakage compensation. Leakage Current at 125 kVp

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 125kVp to give proper leakage compensation. Last Calibratible Tap

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The index of the last tap combination that could be calibrated during Tap Cal. Filament Current Calibrated

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the filament current tables have been calibrated, any other value is false. kVp Calibrated

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated, any other value is false. X–ray Bytes not used: 00B, 00C, 00D, 00E. X–RAY WORDS Turn off Delay at 50 kVp

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 50kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.

10-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Turn off Delay at 80 kVp

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 11

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

00 13

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

00 15

04 C9

05 C3

03 CF

00 17

05 F5

06 EF

04 FB

00 19

08 40

09 33

07 3F

00 1B

0C B2

0D AC

0B BB

00 1D

02 08

02 3A

01 D6

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 80kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs. Turn off Delay at 125 kVp

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 120kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs. Ideal kVp1 Output

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 52 kVp +3 kVp. Ideal kVp2 Output



This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 120 kVp +3 kVp. Actual kVp1 Output

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp1 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.

10-3



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Actual kVp2 Output

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 1F

02 80

02 B2

02 4E

00 21

03 52

03 84

03 20

00 23

04 BB

04 E2

04 7E

00 25

3B 92

4E 20

2710

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp2 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration. Actual kVp3 Output


This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp4 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration. mAs Frequency at 100 mA This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This value is calculated during mAs calibration.

10-4



REV 11

10-2

DIRECTION 46-017207

Auto Cal Filament Current This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Table 10–2 is the first of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.

TABLE 10–2 AUTO CAL FILAMENT CURRENT

kVp at

90 mA

110 mA

Address

Default

Max

Min

Address

Default

Max

Min

50 kVp

00 27

08 09

0F 64

03 0C

00 29

0A 18

0F FF

04 EC

52 kVp

00 2B

07 F5

0F 61

02 E1

00 2D

09 FF

0F FF

04 CB

54 kVp

00 2F

07 E1

0F 37

02 B7

00 31

09 E6

0F FE

04 AA

56 kVp

00 33

07 CD

0F 0C

02 8C

00 35

09 CD

0F DD

04 89

58 kVp

00 37

07 B9

0E E2

02 62

00 39

09 B5

0F BC

04 68

60 kVp

00 3B

07 A5

0E D8

02 4C

00 3D

09 9C

0F 9C

04 48

62 kVp

00 3F

07 91

0E CC

02 35

00 41

09 83

0F 7B

04 27

64 kVp

00 43

07 7D

0E B3

02 15

00 45

09 6A

0F 64

04 06

66 kVp

00 47

07 6D

0E 9C

01 F4

00 49

09 59

0F 5A

03 E5

68 kVp

00 4B

07 5E

0E 90

01 DE

00 4D

09 48

0F 4A

03 C4

70 kVp

00 4F

07 4E

0E 83

01 C7

00 51

09 37

0F 3E

03 A4

72 kVp

00 53

07 3E

0E 6D

01 BB

00 55

09 27

0F 31

03 83

74 kVp

00 57

07 2E

0E 56

01 AE

00 59

09 16

0F 1A

03 62

76 kVp

00 5B

07 1F

0E 4A

01 A2

00 5D

09 05

0F 5D

03 41

80 kVp

00 5F

06 FF

0E 31

01 89

00 61

08 E3

0F 4E

03 00

85 kVp

00 63

06 D8

0E 0C

01 6E

00 65

08 B9

0F 40

02 D4

90 kVp

00 67

06 B9

0D DD

01 53

00 69

08 8B

0E FD

02 A9

95 kVp

00 6B

06 9A

0D AE

01 38

00 6D

08 5D

0F 29

02 7D

100 kVp

00 6F

06 7B

0D 80

01 1E

00 71

08 2F

0E D2

02 52

105 kVp

00 73

06 5B

0D 51

01 03

00 75

08 01

0E A6

02 26

110 kVp

00 77

06 3C

0D 22

00 DE

00 79

07 D3

0E 7B

01 FB

115 kVp

00 7B

06 1D

0C F3

00 C7

00 7D

07 A5

0E 4F

01 CF

120 kVp

00 7F

05 FE

0C C5

00 A9

00 81

07 77

0E 24

01 A4

125 kVp

00 83

05 DF

0C 96

00 7A

00 85

07 49

0D F8

01 78

10-5



REV 11

10-3

DIRECTION 46-017207

Filament Current Calibration Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is copied into Table 10–2 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.

TABLE 10–3 FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE

kVp at

90 mA

110 mA

Address

Default

Max

Min

Address

Default

Max

Min

50 kVp

00 87

08 09

0F 64

03 0C

00 89

0A 18

0F FF

04 EC

52 kVp

00 8B

07 F5

0F 61

02 E1

00 8D

09 FF

0F FF

04 CB

54 kVp

00 8F

07 E1

0F 37

02 B7

00 91

09 E6

0F FE

04 AA

56 kVp

00 93

07 CD

0F 0C

02 8C

00 95

09 CD

0F DD

04 89

58 kVp

00 97

07 B9

0E E2

02 62

00 99

09 B5

0F BC

04 68

60 kVp

00 9B

07 A5

0E D8

02 4C

00 9D

09 9C

0F 9C

04 4B

62 kVp

00 9F

07 91

0E CC

02 35

00 A1

09 83

0F 7B

04 27

64 kVp

00 A3

07 7D

0E B3

02 15

00 A5

09 6A

0F 64

04 06

66 kVp

00 A7

07 6D

0E 9C

01 F4

00 A9

09 59

0F 5A

03 E5

68 kVp

00 AB

07 5E

0E 90

01 DE

00 AD

09 48

0F 4A

03 C4

70 kVp

00 AF

07 4E

0E 83

01 C7

00 B1

09 37

0F 3E

03 A4

72 kVp

00 B3

07 3E

0E 6D

01 BB

00 B5

09 27

0F 31

03 83

74 kVp

00 B7

07 2E

0E 56

01 AE

00 B9

09 16

0F 1A

03 62

76 kVp

00 BB

07 1F

0E 4A

01 A2

00 BD

09 05

0F 5D

03 41

80 kVp

00 BF

06 FF

0E 31

01 89

00 C1

08 E3

0F 4E

03 00

85 kVp

00 C3

06 D8

0E 0C

01 6E

00 C5

08 B9

0F 40

02 D4

90 kVp

00 C7

06 B9

0D DD

01 53

00 C9

08 8B

0F 29

02 A9

95 kVp

00 CB

06 9A

0D AE

01 38

00 CD

08 5D

0E FD

02 7D

100 kVp

00 CF

06 7B

0D 80

01 1E

00 D1

08 2F

0E D2

02 52

105 kVp

00 D3

06 5B

0D 51

01 03

00 D5

08 01

0E A6

02 26

110 kVp

00 D7

06 3C

0D 22

00 DE

00 D9

07 D3

0E 7B

01 FB

115 kVp

00 DB

06 1D

0C F3

00 C7

00 DD

07 A5

0E 4F

01 CF

120 kVp

00 DF

05 FE

0C C5

00 A9

00 E1

07 77

0E 24

01 A4

125 kVp

00 E3

05 DF

0C 96

00 7A

00 E5

07 49

0D F8

01 78

10-6



REV 11

10-4

DIRECTION 46-017207

Turns Ratio Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a look–up–table giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 10–4 TURNS RATIO TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

No Taps

00 E7

02 66

03 B6

00 96

K1

00 E9

02 34

03 C4

00 A4

K2

00 EB

02 4F

03 DF

00 BF

K2, K1

00 ED

02 7D

04 0D

00 ED

K3

00 EF

02 E6

04 76

01 56

K3, K1

00 F1

03 28

04 B8

01 98

K3, K2

00 F3

03 33

04 C3

01 A3

K3, K2, K1

00 F5

03 62

04 F2

04 D2

K4

00 F7

03 4A

04 DA

01 BA

K4, K1

00 F9

03 7F

05 0F

01 EF

K4, K2

00 FB

03 AC

05 3C

02 1C

K4, K2, K1

00 FD

03 E1

05 71

02 51

K4, K3

00 FF

04 25

05 B5

02 95

K4, K3, K1

01 01

04 65

05 91

02 D5

K4, K3, K2,

01 03

04 76

06 06

02 E6

K4, K3, K2, K1

01 05

04 C3

06 53

03 33

K5

01 07

05 21

06 B1

03 91

K5, K1

01 09

05 17

06 A7

03 87

K5, K2

01 0B

05 39

06 C9

03 A9

K5, K2, K1

01 0D

05 6A

06 FA

03 DA

K5, K3

01 0F

05 9A

07 2A

04 0A

K5, K3, K1

01 11

05 EB

07 7B

04 5B

K5, K3, K2

01 13

06 24

07 B4

04 94

K5, K3, K2, K1

01 15

06 8D

08 1D

04 FD

K6, K3

01 17

06 EA

08 7A

05 5A

K6, K3, K1

01 19

06 F3

08 83

05 63

K6, K3, K2

01 1B

07 23

08 B3

05 93

K6, K3, K2, K1

01 1D

07 AF

09 3F

06 1F

10-7



REV 11

10-5

DIRECTION 46-017207

System Resistance Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look– up–table giving the effective system resistance (battery to x–ray tube) for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 10–5 SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

No Taps

01 1F

00 D3

01 9B

00 6F

K1

01 21

00 E1

01 A9

00 7D

K2

01 23

00 C7

01 8F

00 64

K2, K1

01 25

00 D0

01 98

00 6C

K3

01 27

01 37

01 FF

00 6F

K3, K1

01 29

01 54

02 1C

00 8C

K3, K2

01 2B

01 27

02 53

00 96

K3, K2, K1

01 2D

01 34

01 FC

00 9E

K4

01 2F

00 D2

01 9A

00 6E

K4, K1

01 31

00 EA

01 B2

00 86

K4, K2

01 33

00 F9

01 C1

00 95

K4, K2, K1

01 35

01 11

01 D9

00 AD

K4, K3

01 37

01 3A

02 02

00 C2

K4, K3, K1

01 39

01 5F

02 27

00 C3

K4, K3, K2,

01 3B

01 51

02 19

00 C5

K4, K3, K2, K1

01 3D

01 8B

02 53

00 C7

K5

01 3F

01 AC

02 74

00 C8

K5, K1

01 41

01 7C

02 44

00 D2

K5, K2

01 43

01 8F

02 57

00 DB

K5, K2, K1

01 45

01 A7

02 6F

00 DF

K5, K3

01 47

01 C1

02 89

00 F9

K5, K3, K1

01 49

01 FF

02 C7

01 37

K5, K3, K2

01 4B

02 23

02 EB

01 5B

K5, K3, K2, K1

01 4D

02 7C

03 44

01 B4

K6, K3

01 4F

02 B3

03 7B

01 C2

K6, K3, K1

01 51

02 9C

03 64

01 C2

K6, K3, K2

01 53

02 B4

03 7C

01 C2

K6, K3, K2, K1

01 55

03 37

03 E7

01 C5

10-8



REV 11

10-6

DIRECTION 46-017207

Drive Parameters

TABLE 10–6 DRIVE PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

0A

14

00

01 61

0A

14

00

01 62

80

90

70

01 63

64

C8

32

01 64

64

C8

32

01 65

80

90

70

01 66

64

C8

32

01 67

64

C8

32

DRIVE BYTES Drive Threshold01 60

Drive command deadband in DAC counts around the zero output value. Drive Equal Value

The maximum difference between the left and right drive output commands in DAC counts for which the left and right output commands will be made equal. Left Output Zero Point

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive command. Left Forward Output Gain

The left output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Left Reverse Output Gain

The left output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Right Output Zero Point

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive command. Right Forward output Gain

The right output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Right Reverse output Gain

The right output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.

10-9



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 10–6 (CONT.) DRIVE PARAMETERS

Data

Right Forward Position is Greater

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

01 68

01

01

00

01 69

00

01

00

01 6A

C8

FF

28

01 6B

80

CO

10

01 6C

80

FO

30

01 6D

08 00

0C 00

05 00

01 6F

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the right drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces. Left Forward Position is Greater

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the left drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces. Acceleration Factor

Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this number is the more responsive the unit will be after the drive handle is calibrated. Left Minimum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the left handle transducer. Left Maximum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the left handle transducer. DRIVE WORDS Left Input Zero Point

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force applied to the drive handle on the left side. Left Forward Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.

10-10



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Left Reverse Input Gain

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

01 71

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 73

08 00

0C 00

05 00

01 75

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 77

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 79

00 80

00 CO

00 10

01 7B

00 80

00 FO

00 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Input Zero Point

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force is applied to the drive handle on the right side. Right Forward Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the right input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Reverse Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Minimum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the right handle transducer. Right Maximum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the right handle transducer.

10-11



REV 11

10-7

DIRECTION 46-017207

Charge Parameters

TABLE 10–7 CHARGE PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

CHARGE BYTES EQUALIZATION AMP HR Amount of charge returned to battery before an equalization cycle is required. (extended recharge) (not used with PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1).

01 7D

AF

C8

32

Maximum High Charge Time The maximum time in hours that the unit can charge. If this time is exceeded, an error condition is flagged and trickle charge is entered.

01 7E

OF

14

0A

Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage The maximum long term voltage allowed during trickle charge.

01 7F

7C

80

75

High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration.

01 80

32

3C

28

High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration.

01 81

19

23

0F

Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration.

01 82

C8

E1

AF

Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration.

01 83

64

7D

4B

10-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 10–7 (CONT.) CHARGE PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Start Timed Charge Counts The DAC count at which the final charge phase begins.

01 84

1A* 24**

34* 34**

10* 10**

High Charge Clamp Volts The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during charging. Charging current will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.

01 85

82

85

7D

* VALUE FOR PROM 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 ** VALUE FOR PROM 46–303272G1/46–303273G1

10-13



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

EQUALIZATION CLAMP VOLTS The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during the charging equalization cycle. (not used).

01 86

84

8C

80

EQUALIZATION TIME The time to ”equalization complete” when the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs. (not used).

01 87

12

40

06

FINAL PHASE TIME The time to ”Charge Completed” from the time the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs.

01 88

06* 06**

0C* 12**

00* 00**


10-14



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Feedback at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 89

09 C4

13 88

04 B0

Feedback at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 8B

04 4C

05 DC

02 58

mA at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 8D

03 E8

04 E2

02 EE

mA at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 8F

01 F4

02 EE

00 FA

CHARGE WORDS

10-15



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge High Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode.

01 91

27 10

61 A8

13 88

Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode.

01 93

13 88

3A 98

03 E8

Maximum Charging mA The maximum allowable charging current in milliamps.

01 97

09 C4

0B B8

07 D0

Charge Current Feedback Error The error window on the expected charge current feedback in VCO pulse counts.

01 99

02 EE

03 E8

01 F4

10-16



REV 11

10-8

DIRECTION 46-017207

Battery Parameters

TABLE 10–8 BATTERY PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

BATTERY WORDS Not used

01 9B

Zero Capacity Change Maximum change for battery aging. (Use 0000 to disable battery aging)

01 9D

19 19

FF FF

00 00

Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2D 50 Hex is, decimal 11600 100 = 116.00 V.

01 9F

2D 50* 2C 88**

2E 18* 2E 18**

2C EC* 2C 24**

Battery Volts Calibration Count This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of VCO pulse counts obtained in a five second period during battery voltage meter calibration.

01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V.

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40


10-17



REV 11

10-9

DIRECTION 46-017207

Field Light Parameters

TABLE 10–9 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light on Time The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released.

01 A7

1E

2D

05

Maximum Field Light on Time The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired.

01 A8

C8

FF

64

Field Light Cool Time The cool (off) time in seconds required once the field light has been on for more than Maximum Field Light On Time.

01 A9

FF

FF

64

Minimum no Cool Time The time in seconds for which the field light will be disabled if an operator attempts to light the field light. This occurs only when field light heat capacity is approaching maximum limit.

01 AA

08

0F

04

10-18



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 11 DATA BASE FOR AMX–4 UNITS WITH: PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1, 46–316685G1/46–316686G1, OR 46–329187G1/ 46–329188G1, OR 46–329187G2/ 46–329188G2 AND CPU BOARD 46–264974 11-1

Calibratible X–Ray Parameters This section contains a complete listing of the AMX–4 Data Base.

TABLE 11–1 CALIBRATIBLE X–RAY PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

99

C8

64

00 01

14

1E

0A

00 02

1E

28

0A

00 03

5A

78

3C

00 04

0A

10

00

00 05

00

64

00

00 06

0A

C8

00

X–RAY BYTES Counts Per mAs00 00 This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The

number of VCO pulses required for 1.0 mAs of X–ray emission. Battery Recovery Time

Time in seconds that the WAIT message will be displayed after an exposure. This is the time it takes the batteries to recover after an exposure so that technique accuracy can be guaranteed. Max Prep to Exposure Time

The maximum time in seconds that the unit can remain in “prep” before an exit is forced. Initial Heat Wait Time

The maximum heat wait time in seconds required after an exposure. Max Filament Current Change

The maximum number of DAC counts the Automatic Calibration Filament Current Table Elements can change after most exposures. Used only during auto calibration. Leakage Current at 50 kVp

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 50kVp to give proper leakage compensation. Leakage Current at 80 kVp

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 80kVp to give proper leakage compensation.

11-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Leakage Current at 125 kVp

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 07

21

FA

0A

00 08

12

1B

10

00 09

FF

FF

00

00 0A

FF

FF

00

00

FF

00

00 0F

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

00 11

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

The number of leakage current DAC counts required at 125kVp to give proper leakage compensation. Last Calibratible Tap

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The index of the last tap combination that could be calibrated during Tap Cal. Filament Current Calibrated

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates filament current tables have been calibrated. Any other value is false. kVp Calibrated

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates the kVp has been calibrated. Any other value is false. Taps Calibrated00 0B

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Hex value 01 indicates Taps have been calibrated. Any other value is false.

X–RAY WORDS Turn off Delay at 50 kVp

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Time in microseconds between EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 50kVp. This time used to determine when to terminate exposure in order to get selected mAs. Turn off Delay at 80 kVp

This value established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Time in microseconds between EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 80kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs.

11-2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Turn off Delay at 125 kVp

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 13

03 E8

07 D0

00 FA

00 15

04 C9

05 C3

03 CF

00 17

05 F5

06 EF

04 FB

00 19

08 40

09 33

07 3F

00 1B

0C B2

0D AC

0B BB

00 1D

02 08

02 3A

01 D6

00 1F

02 80

02 B2

02 4E

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The time in microseconds between the EXP STOP CMND being given and XRAY ON going low at 120kVp. This time is used to determine when to terminate the exposure in order to get the selected mAs. Ideal kVp1 Output




This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The DAC counts required to get 120 kVp +3 kVp. Actual kVp1 Output


This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp2 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration.

11-3



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Actual kVp3 Output

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

00 21

03 52

03 84

03 20

00 23

04 BB

04 E2

04 7E

00 25

3B 92

4E 20

27 10


This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Actual kVp multiplied by 10 which resulted from the Ideal kVp4 Output DAC count. This parameter is entered during kVp calibration. mAs Frequency at 100 mA This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The

100mA frequency from the mA VCO. This value is calculated during mAs calibration.

Locations 27 through 86 are not used.

11-4



REV 11

11-2

DIRECTION 46-017207

Filament Current Calibration Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is modified only during filament current table calibration. After calibration it is copied into Table 11–2 Auto Cal Filament Current Table.

TABLE 11–2 FILAMENT CURRENT CALIBRATION TABLE

kVp at

90 mA

110 mA

Address

Default

Max

Min

Address

Default

Max

Min

50 kVp

00 87

08 09

0F 64

03 0C

00 89

0A 18

0F FF

04 EC

52 kVp

00 8B

07 F5

0F 61

02 E1

00 8D

09 FF

0F FF

04 CB

54 kVp

00 8F

07 E1

0F 37

02 B7

00 91

09 E6

0F FE

04 AA

56 kVp

00 93

07 CD

0F 0C

02 8C

00 95

09 CD

0F DD

04 89

58 kVp

00 97

07 B9

0E E2

02 62

00 99

09 B5

0F BC

04 68

60 kVp

00 9B

07 A5

0E D8

02 4C

00 9D

09 9C

0F 9C

04 4B

62 kVp

00 9F

07 91

0E CC

02 35

00 A1

09 83

0F 7B

04 27

64 kVp

00 A3

07 7D

0E B3

02 15

00 A5

09 6A

0F 64

04 06

66 kVp

00 A7

07 6D

0E 9C

01 F4

00 A9

09 59

0F 5A

03 E5

68 kVp

00 AB

07 5E

0E 90

01 DE

00 AD

09 48

0F 4A

03 C4

70 kVp

00 AF

07 4E

0E 83

01 C7

00 B1

09 37

0F 3E

03 A4

72 kVp

00 B3

07 3E

0E 6D

01 BB

00 B5

09 27

0F 31

03 83

74 kVp

00 B7

07 2E

0E 56

01 AE

00 B9

09 16

0F 1A

03 62

76 kVp

00 BB

07 1F

0E 4A

01 A2

00 BD

09 05

0F 5D

03 41

80 kVp

00 BF

06 FF

0E 31

01 89

00 C1

08 E3

0F 4E

03 00

85 kVp

00 C3

06 D8

0E 0C

01 6E

00 C5

08 B9

0F 40

02 D4

90 kVp

00 C7

06 B9

0D DD

01 53

00 C9

08 8B

0F 29

02 A9

95 kVp

00 CB

06 9A

0D AE

01 38

00 CD

08 5D

0E FD

02 7D

100 kVp

00 CF

06 7B

0D 80

01 1E

00 D1

08 2F

0E D2

02 52

105 kVp

00 D3

06 5B

0D 51

01 03

00 D5

08 01

0E A6

02 26

110 kVp

00 D7

06 3C

0D 22

00 DE

00 D9

07 D3

0E 7B

01 FB

115 kVp

00 DB

06 1D

0C F3

00 C7

00 DD

07 A5

0E 4F

01 CF

120 kVp

00 DF

05 FE

0C C5

00 A9

00 E1

07 77

0E 24

01 A4

125 kVp

00 E3

05 DF

0C 96

00 7A

00 E5

07 49

0D F8

01 78

11-5



REV 11

11-3

DIRECTION 46-017207

Turns Ratio Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. It is a look–up–table giving the effective turns ratio (battery volts to kVp) of the system for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 11–3 TURNS RATIO TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

No Taps

00 E7

02 66

03 B6

00 96

K1

00 E9

02 34

03 C4

00 A4

K2

00 EB

02 4F

03 DF

00 BF

K2, K1

00 ED

02 7D

04 0D

00 ED

K3

00 EF

02 E6

04 76

01 56

K3, K1

00 F1

03 28

04 B8

01 98

K3, K2

00 F3

03 33

04 C3

01 A3

K3, K2, K1

00 F5

03 62

04 F2

04 D2

K4

00 F7

03 4A

04 DA

01 BA

K4, K1

00 F9

03 7F

05 0F

01 EF

K4, K2

00 FB

03 AC

05 3C

02 1C

K4, K2, K1

00 FD

03 E1

05 71

02 51

K4, K3

00 FF

04 25

05 B5

02 95

K4, K3, K1

01 01

04 65

05 91

02 D5

K4, K3, K2,

01 03

04 76

06 06

02 E6

K4, K3, K2, K1

01 05

04 C3

06 53

03 33

K5

01 07

05 21

06 B1

03 91

K5, K1

01 09

05 17

06 A7

03 87

K5, K2

01 0B

05 39

06 C9

03 A9

K5, K2, K1

01 0D

05 6A

06 FA

03 DA

K5, K3

01 0F

05 9A

07 2A

04 0A

K5, K3, K1

01 11

05 EB

07 7B

04 5B

K5, K3, K2

01 13

06 24

07 B4

04 94

K5, K3, K2, K1

01 15

06 8D

08 1D

04 FD

K6, K3

01 17

06 EA

08 7A

05 5A

K6, K3, K1

01 19

06 F3

08 83

05 63

K6, K3, K2

01 1B

07 23

08 B3

05 93

K6, K3, K2, K1

01 1D

07 AF

09 3F

06 1F

11-6



REV 11

11-4

DIRECTION 46-017207

System Resistance Taps This table is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A look– up–table giving the effective system resistance (battery to x–ray tube) for each valid tap combination. It is calculated during tap calibration.

TABLE 11–4 SYSTEM RESISTANCE TAPS

Relay Tap Selection

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

No Taps

01 1F

00 D3

01 9B

00 6F

K1

01 21

00 E1

01 A9

00 7D

K2

01 23

00 C7

01 8F

00 64

K2, K1

01 25

00 D0

01 98

00 6C

K3

01 27

01 37

01 FF

00 6F

K3, K1

01 29

01 54

02 1C

00 8C

K3, K2

01 2B

01 27

02 53

00 96

K3, K2, K1

01 2D

01 34

01 FC

00 9E

K4

01 2F

00 D2

01 9A

00 6E

K4, K1

01 31

00 EA

01 B2

00 86

K4, K2

01 33

00 F9

01 C1

00 95

K4, K2, K1

01 35

01 11

01 D9

00 AD

K4, K3

01 37

01 3A

02 02

00 C2

K4, K3, K1

01 39

01 5F

02 27

00 C3

K4, K3, K2,

01 3B

01 51

02 19

00 C5

K4, K3, K2, K1

01 3D

01 8B

02 53

00 C7

K5

01 3F

01 AC

02 74

00 C8

K5, K1

01 41

01 7C

02 44

00 D2

K5, K2

01 43

01 8F

02 57

00 DB

K5, K2, K1

01 45

01 A7

02 6F

00 DF

K5, K3

01 47

01 C1

02 89

00 F9

K5, K3, K1

01 49

01 FF

02 C7

01 37

K5, K3, K2

01 4B

02 23

02 EB

01 5B

K5, K3, K2, K1

01 4D

02 7C

03 44

01 B4

K6, K3

01 4F

02 B3

03 7B

01 C2

K6, K3, K1

01 51

02 9C

03 64

01 C2

K6, K3, K2

01 53

02 B4

03 7C

01 C2

K6, K3, K2, K1

01 55

03 37

03 E7

01 C5

11-7



REV 11

11-5

DIRECTION 46-017207

Drive Parameters

TABLE 11–5 DRIVE PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

0A

14

00

01 61

0A

14

00

01 62

80

90

70

01 63

64

C8

32

01 64

64

C8

32

01 65

80

90

70

01 66

64

C8

32

01 67

64

C8

32

DRIVE BYTES Drive Threshold01 60

Drive command deadband in DAC counts around the zero output value. Drive Equal Value

The maximum difference between the left and right drive output commands in DAC counts for which the left and right output commands will be made equal. Left Output Zero Point

The DAC count which gives a zero left drive command. Left Forward Output Gain

The left output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Left Reverse Output Gain

The left output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Right Output Zero Point

The DAC count which gives a zero right drive command. Right Forward output Gain

The right output gain in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1. Right Reverse output Gain

The right output gain in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 100. i.e. default of 64 Hex is, decimal 100 100 = gain of 1.

11-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Right Forward Position is Greater

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

01 68

01

01

00

01 69

00

01

00

01 6A

C8

FF

28

01 6B

80

CO

10

01 6C

80

FO

30

01 6D

08 00

0C 00

05 00

01 6F

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the right drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces. Left Forward Position is Greater

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. Indicates magnet polarity of the Hall Effect Drive Sensor. A 01 Hex indicates that pushing forward on the left drive handle results in a more positive transducer voltage than pulling back produces. Acceleration Factor

Controls handle sensitivity. The larger this number is the more responsive the unit will be after the drive handle is calibrated. Left Minimum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the left handle transducer. Left Maximum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the left handle transducer. DRIVE WORDS Left Input Zero Point

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force applied to the drive handle on the left side. Left Forward Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21.

11-9



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Left Reverse Input Gain

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

01 71

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 73

08 00

0C 00

05 00

01 75

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 77

00 D2

07 D0

00 19

01 79

00 80

00 CO

00 10

01 7B

00 80

00 FO

00 30

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Input Zero Point

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The number of A/D counts with no force is applied to the drive handle on the right side. Right Forward Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the right input in the forward direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Reverse Input Gain

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The gain applied to the left input in the reverse direction. The gain is given by (decimal equivalent) 1000. i.e. default of D2 Hex is, decimal 210 1000 = gain of 0.21. Right Minimum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The minimum value from the right handle transducer. Right Maximum Input

This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The maximum value from the right handle transducer.

11-10



REV 11

11-6

DIRECTION 46-017207

Charge Parameters

TABLE 11–6 CHARGE PARAMETERS

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

CHARGE BYTES TOP OFF TIME Additional charge time in minutes that the system will charge after switching to trickle mode. This is the absolute minimum time to “Charge Complete.” (Not used with PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1.)

01 7D

AF* 2E**

C8* FF**

32* 00**

Maximum High Charge Time The maximum time in hours that the unit can charge. If this time is exceeded, an error condition is flagged and trickle charge is entered.

01 7E

OF

14

0A

Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage The maximum long term voltage allowed during trickle charge.

01 7F

7C

80

75

High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration.

01 80

32

3C

28

High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during charger calibration.

01 81

19

23

0F

Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration.

01 82

C8

E1

AF

Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. A charge command DAC count used during trickle charge calibration

01 83

64

7D

4B

* Values for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2 11-11



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Start Timed Charge Counts The DAC count at which the final charge phase begins.

01 84

24* 1A** 1A***

34* 34** 34***

10* 10** 10***

High Charge Clamp Volts The maximum battery voltage in volts allowed during charging. Charging current will decrease in order to clamp the voltage.

01 85

82* 7F** 82***

85* 85** 87***

7D* 7D** 7D***

FINAL PHASE TIME The time to “Charge Completed” from the time the switch to the trickle charge rate occurs.

01 88

06

12

00

* Values for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 *** Values for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

11-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Feedback at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 89

09 C4

13 88

04 B0

Feedback at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output

01 8B

04 4C

05 DC

02 58

mA at High Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge High Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 8D

03 E8

04 E2

02 EE

mA at High Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charging current in milliamps with the charge current demand DAC set to High Charge Low Output counts. This parameter is calculated during charger calibration. It is used to determine what the charging current is for any given charge current demand DAC output.

01 8F

01 F4

02 EE

00 FA

CHARGE WORDS

11-13



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Feedback at Trickle Charge High Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge High Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode.

01 91

27 10

61 A8

13 88

Feedback at Trickle Charge Low Output This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The charge current feedback in VCO pulses obtained during one second with the charge current demand set to Trickle Charge Low Output counts in the trickle charge mode. This parameter is used to determine what the charging current feedback should be for any given charge current demand DAC output in the trickle charge mode.

01 93

13 88

3A 98

03 E8

Maximum Charging mA The maximum allowable charging current in milliamps.

01 97

09 C4

0B B8

07 D0

Charge Current Feedback Error The error window on the expected charge current feedback in VCO pulse count.

01 99

02 EE

03 E8

01 F4

11-14



REV 11

11-7

DIRECTION 46-017207

Battery Parameters for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

TABLE 11–7 BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

TRICKLE LMT The number of charge cutoff cycles run before a complete charge is allowed. Both lower and upper bytes must be the same.

01 9B

14 14* 09 09**

FF FF* FF FF**

00 00* 00 00**

Battery Aging Disable Enter 0000 to disable battery aging compensation.

01 9D

19 19* 00 00**

FF FF* FF FF**

00 00* 00 00**

Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C 88 Hex is, decimal 11400 100 = 114.00 V.

01 9F

2C 88

2E 18

2C 24


01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V.

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40

Breaker Trip Time The number of hours before breaker trips for certain charger failures.

01 A5

03 03

FF FF

00 00

BATTERY WORDS

* Values for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 ** Values for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

11-15



REV 11

11-8

DIRECTION 46-017207

Battery Parameters for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

TABLE 11–8 BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

TRICKLE LMT The number of charge cutoff cycles run before a complete charge is allowed. Both lower and upper bytes must be the same.

01 9B

09 09

FF FF

00 00

Battery Aging Disable Enter 0000 to disable battery aging compensation.

01 9D

19 19

FF FF

00 00

Monitor Full Capacity millivolts Battery voltage which corresponds to 100% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2C EC Hex is, decimal 11500 100 = 115.00 V.

01 9F

2C EC

2E 18

2C 24


01 A1

8A CC

EA 60

4E 20

Battery Calibration Millivolts This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. The voltage in volts times 100 at the time that Battery Volts Calibration Counts was obtained. i.e. default of 2BCA. Hex is, decimal 11210 100 = 112.10 V.

01 A3

2B CA

3A 98

1F 40

Breaker Trip Time The number of hours before breaker trips for certain charger failures.

01 A5

03 03

FF FF

00 00

BATTERY WORDS

11-16



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 11–8 (CONT.) BATTERY PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

01A7 Total Capacity Indicates the total capacity available over the range of the capacity bar graph in mAHR.

1964

2328

03E8

01A9 Idle Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the idle mode.

012C

03E8

0032

01AB Drive Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the drive mode.

0BB8

2710

01F4

01AD Field Light Load Current Indicates the level of load current (in milliamps) on the batteries when the field light is on.

09C4

1B58

01F4

01AF Prep Load Current Indicates the level of non–exposure load current (in milliamps) on the batteries in the x–ray mode.

0BB8

1B58

01F4

01B1 Nominal 0% Capacity Millivolts Sets the nominal 0% capacity battery voltage (in tens of millivolts).

2BC0

2C88

2AF8

01B3 Full Charge Excess Capacity Indicates the amount of extra capacity (in mAHR) available at “CHARGE COMPLETE”.

01F4

03E8

0000

11-17



REV 11

11-9

DIRECTION 46-017207

Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

TABLE 11–9 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light On–Time The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released.

01 A7

1E

2D

05

Maximum Field Light On–Time The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired.

01 A8

C8

FF

64


01 A9

FF

FF

64


01 AA

08

0F

04

11-18



REV 11

11-10

DIRECTION 46-017207

Field Light Parameters for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

TABLE 11–10 FIELD LIGHT PARAMETERS FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

Data

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

FIELD LIGHT BYTES Field Light On–Time The time in seconds that the field light will be on after the field light switch is released.

01 BB

1E

2D

05

Maximum Field Light On–Time The maximum continuous field light operating time in seconds. Once this time has been exceeded the field light is turned off and will be disabled until Field Light Cool Time seconds have expired.

01 BC

C8

FF

64


01 BD

FF

FF

64


01 BE

08

0F

04

11-19



REV 11

11-11

DIRECTION 46-017207

Auto Cal Filament Table This value is established during calibration, do not change with Data Base Access. This is the second of the two filament look–up–tables giving the relationship between filament current DAC counts at emission current of 90 and 110 mA for all valid kVp stations. This table is updated after most exposures to maintain this relationship.

TABLE 11–11 AUTO CAL FILAMENT TABLE

kVp at

90 mA

110 mA

Address

Default

Max

Min

Address

Default

Max

Min

50 kVp

0C 2D

08 09

0F 64

03 0C

0C 2F

0A 18

0F FF

04 EC

52 kVp

0C 31

07 F5

0F 61

02 E1

0C 33

09 FF

0F FF

04 CB

54 kVp

0C 35

07 E1

0F 37

02 B7

0C 37

09 E6

0F FE

04 AA

56 kVp

0C 39

07 CD

0F 0C

02 8C

0C 3B

09 CD

0F DD

04 89

58 kVp

0C 3D

07 B9

0E E2

02 62

0C 3F

09 B5

0F BC

04 68

60 kVp

0C 41

07 A5

0E D8

02 4C

0C 43

09 9C

0F 9C

04 4B

62 kVp

0C 45

07 91

0E CC

02 35

0C 47

09 83

0F 7B

04 27

64 kVp

0C 49

07 7D

0E B3

02 15

0C 4B

09 6A

0F 64

04 06

66 kVp

0C 4D

07 6D

0E 9C

01 F4

0C 4F

09 59

0F 5A

03 E5

68 kVp

0C 51

07 5E

0E 90

01 DE

0C 53

09 48

0F 4A

03 C4

70 kVp

0C 55

07 4E

0E 83

01 C7

0C 57

09 37

0F 3E

03 A4

72 kVp

0C 59

07 3E

0E 6D

01 BB

0C 5B

09 27

0F 31

03 83

74 kVp

0C 5D

07 2E

0E 56

01 AE

0C 5F

09 16

0F 1A

03 62

76 kVp

0C 61

07 1F

0E 4A

01 A2

0C 63

09 05

0F 5D

03 41

80 kVp

0C 65

06 FF

0E 31

01 89

0C 67

08 E3

0F 4E

03 00

85 kVp

0C 69

06 D8

0E 0C

01 6E

0C 6B

08 B9

0F 40

02 D4

90 kVp

0C 6D

06 B9

0D DD

01 53

0C 6F

08 8B

0F 29

02 A9

95 kVp

0C 71

06 9A

0D AE

01 38

0C 73

08 5D

0E FD

02 7D

100 kVp

0C 75

06 7B

0D 80

01 1E

0C 77

08 2F

0E D2

02 52

105 kVp

0C 79

06 5B

0D 51

01 03

0C 7B

08 01

0E A6

02 26

110 kVp

0C 7D

06 3C

0D 22

00 DE

0C 7F

07 D3

0E 7B

01 FB

115 kVp

0C 81

06 1D

0C F3

00 C7

0C 83

07 A5

0E 4F

01 CF

120 kVp

0C 85

05 FE

0C C5

00 A9

0C 87

07 77

0E 24

01 A4

125 kVp

0C 89

05 DF

0C 96

00 7A

0C 8B

07 49

0D F8

01 78

11-20



REV 11

11-12

DIRECTION 46-017207

Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 or 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

TABLE 11–12 MONITOR ZERO CAPACITY MILLIVOLTS FOR PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 OR 46–316685G1/46–316686G1

Data

Monitor Zero Capacity Millivolts Battery voltages which correspond to 0% capacity times 100. i.e. default of 2B C0. Hex is decimal. 11200 100 = 112.00V.

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

0C 8D

2B C0

2C 88

2B C0

11-21



REV 11

11-13

DIRECTION 46-017207

Battery Aging Capacity Offset for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2

TABLE 11–13 BATTERY AGING CAPACITY OFFSET FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1

Data

Battery Aging Capacity Offset Offsets to total capacity in mA–HR. When this value is non–zero, it has the effect of reducing the amount of capacity available over the range of the capacity display.

Address

Default

Maximum

Minimum

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

Hex Value

0C 8D

00 00

FF FF

00 00

11-22



SECTION 12 ERROR CODES 12-1

Introduction This section contains error prompt listings, the probable cause, and recommended acĆ tions to correct the problem. The error listings are organized into three categories, Power Up Errors, Calibration Errors, and Applications Errors. Error prompts are listed in alphanumeric order within these three categories. Software detected errors are divided into three categories: 1. Software errors like Battery Error 4 and Check Sum Err 1. These involve calcuĆ lations and parameter passing. 2. Data errors like Cal Charger Err 3. These are the result of comparing calibration values in RAM with allowed maximum or minimum values stored in PROM. 3. Hardware errors like Battery Error 1. These are the result of an error bit set durĆ ing a read; or comparing a calibration port value with the allowed maximum or minimum value stored in PROM.

12-2

Applications Error Handling Overview When an applications runĆtime error occurs, the status signal which leads to the error is checked again to make sure that it wasn't a noise glitch that caused it. If the recheck indicates no problem, a glitch is assumed and the original error is ignored. When the recheck yields the error again, a fault is assumed and appropriate action is taken. This involves both displaying an error code and message, and logging the error code in a circular error buffer and adding it to a histogram of errors. If a fault is found during application code processing, the error code is displayed along with an appropriate erĆ ror message. A fault will not necessarily bring down the whole system, it will only inĆ hibit the applicable function. For example, a drive mode fault will inhibit drive, an xĆ ray mode fault will inhibit xĆray, and a charge fault will inhibit charging. The exception to this is the Watchdog timeĆout error which disables all functions and places the procĆ essor in a powerĆdown state.

12-3

Circular Error Buffer This is a 256 Byte buffer in non-volatile RAM where error codes are stored in the order in which they occur. The most recent 256 error codes are kept. Any previous erĆ ror codes are lost.

12-4

Histogram Of Errors This buffer, also in non-volatile RAM, keeps a history of the number of times each error has occurred. The error code count stops at 255, after which, any additional erĆ rors are ignored by this buffer.

12-1



TABLE 12–1 POWER UP ERROR CODES Error Number

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

No Response

Microprocessor operation verification test. If the displays do not turn on, check the diagnostic LED array on the processor board. If all LEDs are on, the processor is not executing the test. If all LEDs are off, the test failed. This test assumes that the power supplies are working correctly.

Check microprocessor and EPROM if failure occurs.

TEST – 01 FAILED EPROM Check Sum

EPROM Check Sum is calculated and compared with stored value. Error Code 81 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

Check EPROM and microprocessor if failure occurs.

TEST – 02 FAILED RAM Battery Test

The first write to the RAM will not be stored if the RAM battery is below 2.0 volts. The processor writes to RAM then reads the location. An error occurs if the value written is not the same as the value read. Error Code 82 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

Check RAM and it’s associated circuitry. Check the microprocessor.

TEST – 03 FAILED Auxiliary RAM Test

Preserves data form bottom of RAM to top of Data Check RAM and it’s associated circuitry. Make Base. Does not preserve data above top of Data Base. sure RAM is in the correct socket. Error Code 83 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a Check the microprocessor. failure. Check the option switch, S96 on CPU 46–232828 or S75 on CPU 46–264974, to see that ram is selected. Option switch 1 must be in the on (closed) position. Closed = 2k of RAM, open = 4k of RAM.

TEST – 04 FAILED Calibration Data Base Check Sum

Calculates the Check Sum for the Calibration Data Base and compares it with the stored value. Test fails if they are not equal. Entering Calibration will give a more specific error code for the check sum failure. Error Code 84 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

Check Calibration and RAM.

TEST – 05 FAILED Watchdog Timer

Write to timer and read back several times. Test fails if timer is high for more than 75 milliseconds or less than 25 milliseconds. Error Code 85 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

Check HC123 one shot and associated circuitry.

TEST – 06 FAILED Programmable Interval Timer 0 and 2

Timer 1 can not be checked because the program does not have direct control of it’s input gate. Initialize timer 0 for 16 kHz and timer 2 for 120 kHz. Count pulses to verify frequency. Check output 2 for 50% duty cycle. Error Code 86 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure.

Check 82C54 timer, HC151 8 to 1 MUX, oscillator, and all associated circuitry.

TEST – 07 FAILED Analog to Digital Converter Test

Read +5 volt power supply. Test fails if result is below +4.5 volts or above +5.5 volts. Error Code 87 Hex is recorded in the Error Log for a failure. Also tests +24V and 15 supplies if option switch is set to do so. (+24V and 15V supply test only with firmware 46–302688G1/ 46–302687G1 and later on CPU 46–264974. Test enabled by dip switch #3.)

Check +5 volt supply, AD574A A/D Converter, LF398 sample and hold, AD7506 16 to 1 MUX, HC374 latch, and all associated circuitry.

12-2



TABLE 12–2 CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

–CALDAT WARNING–

Something is out of limits. A maximum or minimum value was inserted so that calibration can continue. Continue calibrating and watch for maximum or minimum limit errors.

BATTERY ERROR 1

Counter overflowed while determining battery voltage.

Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be less than 10 kHz. Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be operating properly.

BATTERY ERROR 2

Reading battery voltage indicated less than 80 volts.

Battery voltage must be properly calibrated. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards.

BATTERY ERROR 3

Reading battery voltage indicated more than 150 volts.

Battery voltage must be properly calibrated. Check VCO. Check Charger board.

BATTERY ERROR 4

Voltage value was not saved. An invalid condition was detected. Could not determine if battery voltage was a loaded or unloaded value.

Repeat the test or calibration procedure that caused the error. Replace PROM if problem continues.

BATRY WORD LIMIT

Data for either upper of lower battery calibration limit has been exceeded.

Calibrate volt meter. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be from 55 to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery voltage of 115.0 volts should produce a frequency of 6.3 to 8.6 kHz.

CAL CHGR ERR 1

Hardware counter overflowed while determining charging current.

Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be less than 60 kHz. Multiplexer U76 on Charger Board must be operating properly.

CAL CHGR ERR 2

Reading battery current port indicated charge current frequency was missing.

Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Check for Digital to Analog Converter output at least 0.5 volts at TP–29 on the CPU Board Does charger charge? Does charge voltage develop across charging resistor AMX1 A3 R1?

12-3



TABLE 12–2 (CONT.) CALIBRATION ERROR CODES Error Number

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

CAL CHGR ERR 3

Either upper or lower charger calibration limit has been exceeded.

Calibrate charger. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Does CHARGE SCALE–SELECT signal change state during charger calibration? During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog Converter output voltage at TP–29 on the CPU Board should be: For the first conversion 0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted. For the second conversion 1.5 to 2.5 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted. For the third conversion 2.9 to 4.9 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted. For the fourth conversion 6.8 to 8.8 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted. The average frequency at Charger board TP–6 should be: 1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted 18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted

CAL TAP ERROR 1

The proper mA could not be reached by changing the kVp.

Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Check for bad connections in the X–ray generator.

CAL TAP ERROR 2

More than 140 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap selection that should provide less than 140 kVp.

Repeat the Tap CAL Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Calibrate kVp. Check generator tap relay wiring.

CAL TAP ERROR 3

More than 35 kVp at tube voltage port with a tap selection that should provide 35 kVp.

Charge if battery voltage is less than 112 volts. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure. Check mAs Calibration. Calibrate kVp. Check generator tap relay wiring.

CAL TAP ERROR 4

A high order tap combination produced less kVp then a low order tap combination.

Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.

12-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Probable Cause

Recommended Action

CAL TAP ERROR 5

Even With the filament current digital to analog converter at full count, not enough emission current could be produced.

Check mAs Calibration. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Procedure.

CAL TAP ERROR 6

Even with the filament current digital to analog converter at its lowest value, the emission current was too high.

Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188. Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check generator tap relay wiring. Repeat the Tap Calibration Check mAs Calibration.

CAL TAP ERROR 7

One or more of the tap calibration parameters was out of limits, data exceeded either upper or lower limit value of selected tap.

Either upper or lower limit of filament current calibration points has been exceeded.

CAL TUBE ERR 1

This error always occurs after a limit error.

Refer to the limit error description for additional information.

CAL TUBE ERR 3

One or more of the Filament current table data field limits was exceeded.

This error always occurs after a limit error. Refer to the limit error description for additional information.

CHARG BYTE LIMIT

Reading battery charger port indicated either upper or lower calibration limit exceeded.

Calibrate charger.

CHARG WORD LIMIT

Battery charger upper or lower calibration limit exceeded.

Calibrate charger. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Does CHARGE SCALE–SELECT signal change state during charger calibration? During Calibration, the charge Digital to Analog Converter output voltage at TP–29 on the CPU Board should be: For the first conversion 0.5 to 1.5 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted. For the second conversion 1.5 to 2.5 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted. For the third conversion 2.9 to 4.9 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted. For the fourth conversion 6.8 to 8.8 volts when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted. The average frequency at Charger board TP–6 should be: 1.8 to 2.4 kHz per amp of charge current when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is not asserted. 18 to 24 Hz per milliamp of charge current when CHARGE SCALE–SELECT is asserted.

12-5



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


Probable Cause

Recommended Action

CHECK SUM ERR 1

Drive calibration bytes check sum failed.

Recalibrate drive.

CHECK SUM ERR 2

Drive calibration words check sum failed.

Recalibrate drive.

CHECK SUM ERR 3

Charger calibration bytes check sum failed.

Recalibrate charger.

CHECK SUM ERR 4

Charger calibration words check sum failed.

Recalibrate charger.

CHECK SUM ERR 5

Battery calibration words check sum failed.

Calibrate voltmeter and generator.

CHECK SUM ERR 6

X–Ray calibration bytes check sum failed.

Calibrate generator.

CHECK SUM ERR 7

X–Ray calibration words check sum failed.


CHECK SUM ERR 8

Field light calibration bytes check sum failed.

Calibrate field light.

CHECK SUM ERR 9

Turns ratio calibration check sum failed.


CHECK SUM ERR 10

X–Ray circuit resistance calibration check sum failed.


CHECK SUM ERR 11

Filament current tables have a check sum error, or were not calibrated.

If no other generator checksums are present, Calibrate Filament Current.

DRIVE BYTE LIMIT

Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded.

Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts? Check the ”Handle Check*” circuitry, AMX1 A2A1 shell 4–F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V+/–1% during Handle Calibration.

DRIVE WORD LIMIT

Drive upper or lower calibration limit was exceeded.

Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Is transducer output always between 1 and 9 volts? Check the ”Handle Check *” circuitry AMX1 A2A1 shell 4–F5. TP 29 should be 9.9V +/–1% during Handle Calibration.

FLDLIT TIME LIMT

An invalid time was entered during field light calibration.


FLDLT BYTE LIMIT

Reading field light data indicated either upper or lower time limit was exceeded.


12-6




Probable Cause

Recommended Action

HIGH FIL LIMIT

One or more of the filament current calibration data parameters exceed the limit.

IGNORE IF: The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a new battery backed RAM. The message did not occur during filament current calibration. OTHERWISE: Calibrate mAs. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F–9). Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check x–ray tube Check filament transformer

HNDL CAL ERR 1

Drive handle zero point value was out–of–range.

Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Is transducer output between 2.5 and 7.5 volts? Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/– 1% during Handle Calibration

HNDL CAL ERR 2

Calculated forward gain was out of range.

Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/– 1% during Handle Calibration.

HNDL CAL ERR 3

Calculated reverse gain was out of range.

Calibrate drive. Check wiring to drive handle transducers. Check for +10 volts at transducer input. Does transducer output change when handle is moved? Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/– 1% during Handle Calibration.

HANDLE CAL ERR 4

Drive handle calibration indicated improper polarity relationship between zero, forward, and reverse calibration voltages.

Was the handle moved in the correct direction in response to prompts? Calibrate drive. Check that TP29 is 9.9V +/– 1% during Handle Calibration

KVP CAL ERROR 1

The required kVp and mA can not be reached. Tap combinations do not go high enough. Are tap relays functioning properly?

Calibrate mAs. Is battery voltage drop excessive: See Section 14-1.

KVP CAL ERROR 2

No tap relays pulled in and the required kVp and mA cannot be reached.

Are tap relays functioning properly? Check the High Voltage Cables for shorts. Calibrate mAs.

12-7




Probable Cause

Recommended Action

KVP CAL ERROR 4

One or more of the calibration parameters is out of limits.

Were kVp values entered correctly? Is bleeder properly calibrated? Are all tap relays functioning properly?

LOW FIL LIMIT

One or more of the filament current calibration data parameters is less than the minimum allowed.

IGNORE IF: The unit is being calibrated for the first time with a new battery backed RAM. The message did not occur during filament current calibration. OTHERWISE: Calibrate mAs. Check filament current by checking voltage across Filament and kVp Control board resistor AMX1 A4 A2 R188 (sheet 2 location F–9). Voltage should be about 0.5 volts. This is 0.1 volt per amp of filament current. Check x–ray tube. Check filament transformer.

MAS CAL ERROR 1

The frequency produced by injecting 100 mA during mAs meter calibration was to high causing the counter to overflow.

Was the injected current more than 110 mA? Is the frequency at Filament and kVp Control board TP–2 more than 18 kHz?

MAS CAL ERROR 4

The check to see if data base parameters are being written correctly produced an error.

Check data bus connection on CPU board. Check battery backed RAM.

RAM READBACK ERR

Data read from memory location is not what was written to that location.

SYS RESIST LIMIT

The slope of emission current vs kVp was calculated to be either too flat or too steep at the last tap selection. This error is valid only during tap calibration.

Is mAs properly calibrated? Is kVp properly calibrated? Check the batteries for excessive voltage drop. See Section 14-1.

TURN RATIO LIMIT

The battery voltage to kVp multiplication factor (effective turns ratio) was out of range for the last tap selected.

Is mAs properly calibrated? Is kVp properly calibrated? Check batteries for excessive voltage drop. See Section 14-1.

VOLTMETER ERR 1

Battery voltage frequency is too high causing the counter to overflow.

Is the frequency at Charger board TP–6 more than 10 kHz? Is multiplexer AMX1 A3 A1 U76 on Charger Board functioning properly?

VOLTMETER ERR 4

One or more of the battery voltage calibration data base parameters is out of range.

Calibrate voltmeter. Check connection between CPU and Charger boards. Frequency at Charger Board TP–6 must be from 55 to 75 Hz per volt. For example a battery voltage of 115.0 volts should produce a frequency of 6.3 to 8.6 kHz.

12-8




Probable Cause

Recommended Action

X–RAY BYTE LIMIT

One or more of the x–ray calibration parameters just adjusted are out of range.

DURING MAS CALIBRATION: Was correct mA value entered? Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp boards. Frequency at Filament and kVp Board TP–2 must be between 14 and 18 kHz. Is your mA meter working properly? DURING TAP CALIBRATION: Indicates not enough taps could be calibrated without exceeding the maximum allowable kVp. Is kVp calibration correct? is mAs calibration correct? Is battery voltage more than 117 volts?

X–RAY WORD LIMIT

One or more of the x–ray calibration parameters just adjusted is out of limits.

DURING MAS CALIBRATION: Was correct mA value entered? Check connection between CPU and Filament/kVp boards. Frequency at CPU Board TP–2 must be between 14 and 18 kHz. Is your mA meter working properly? DURING KVP CALIBRATION: Were kVp values entered correctly? Is the bleeder properly calibrated? Are all tap relays functioning properly? DURING FILAMENT TABLE CALIBRATION: Indicates that the turn off delay, the time from the stop command being asserted to X–RAY ON going away is greater than 2.0 ms. Is the kVp calibration jumper removed?

12-9



TABLE 12–3 APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

ERROR 12 Left Drive Stall Release Handle

Left stall signal was detected.

Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds, etc.) Check snubbers on motor relays. Check brakes. Check motors. Code 12 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 19 Release Handle

Invalid drive command feedback was detected.

The message is normal if the unit was being driven fast down an incline, the wheels left the ground, or occasionally while positioning with the tube not parked. Infrequent occurrences are not a problem! Check drive fuses (3). Check to see that connectors are in place in the drive module. Check drive relays. Code 19 in the error list.

ERROR 13 Right Drive Stall Release Handle

Right stall signal was detected.

Occasional occurrence are normal (i.e. elevator thresholds, etc.) Check snubbers on motor relays. Check brakes. Check motors. Code 13 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 44 Battery too High Voltage Recovery is Required

Battery voltage was higher than expected during prep.

If the unit just came off of a charge cycle, the surface charge must be bled off of the batteries. (15 to 20 minute wait) Driving the unit, turning on the field light, or repeatedly prepping the unit will reduce the wait. This message is dependent on technique. Lower techniques can be used at high battery voltage. Code 44 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45 Battery too Low Charge Required

Battery voltage was lower than expected during prep.

Code 45 Hex in the error list. A battery charge cycle may be required if the bar graph shows low capacity. Check batteries if bar graph shows significant charge remaining. See Section 14-1.

ERROR 23 Display Error

The DISPLAY OK status signal was low indicating the display controller malfunctioned, or there was faulty feedback.

Check DISPLAY OK signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic. Check connection from CPU to display controller. Check display controller. Error Code 23 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 70 Halting Error

Watch dog timer shut the system down.

Does the unit pass power-up tests? Check the watchdog U137 on CPU 46–232828 or U65 on 46–264974 and associated components. Is there excessive noise somewhere that may cause the CPU to get lost. Are there glitches on CPU reset line? Error Code 70 Hex in the Error List.

12-10



TABLE 12–3 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

ERROR 101 Charge Fault

Charging current feedback value was high during high current charging.

Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on CPU 46–264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large step change in line voltage? Error Code 01 Hex in the error list.


Charging current feedback value was low during high current charging.

Check BAT V & CHARGER CUR SEL signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on CPU 46–264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large drop in line voltage? Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just charged? The charger may saturate faster than the firmware can compensate in this case. Were locks or extraneous loads left on? Error Code 02 Hex in the error list.


Charging current feedback value was high during trickle charge.

Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on CPU 46–264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large change in line voltage? Error Code 03 Hex in the error list.


Charging current feedback value was low during trickle charge.

Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Is the charge current demand DAC functioning properly? Are multiplexers U77 on CPU 46–232828 or U123 on 46–264974 and U76 on Charger Board functioning properly? Was there a very large drop in line voltage? Was charging initiated immediately after the unit was just charged? The charger may saturate faster than the firmware can compensate in this case. Error Code 04 Hex in the error list.

12-11




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


The charger has been operating at full charger output for more than 15 hours.

Was the unit calibrated properly? Is the line voltage low? Was the battery voltage below 110 volts before the charge was initiated? Were the batteries discharged to less than 108 volts? If so a few charge and run cycles may be needed to rejuvenate them. Error Code 05 Hex in the error list.


Charge current feedback value was zero.

Check FREQ FDBK 0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 Location B 9 of the CPU schematic. If a voltage is developed across AMX1-A3-R1 when the unit is first plugged in, the feedback circuitry is defective, otherwise look for a faulty connection or a charge board failure. Error Code 06 Hex in the error list.


Charge clamp voltage was exceeded at zero charge current demand.

Check CHARGE SCALE SELECT signal of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 Location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the charge command reach the charge board correctly? Error Code 07 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 210 Drive Fault

Left stall feedback circuitry is defective. A stall is indicated after the drive board has been reset.

Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU. Error Code 10 Hex in the error list.


Right stall feedback circuitry is defective A stall is indicated after the drive boardhas been reset.

Check stall circuits from drive board to CPU. Error Code 11 Hex in the error list.


Left drive current feedback from the drive control was higher than the command from the CPU board.

Check connections from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 14 Hex in the error list.


Left drive current feedback from the drive control was lower than the command from the CPU board.

Check current from the CPU board to the drive control board. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. Check drive module fuses. Check the feedback circuits on the drive control board. Check to see if all connectors in the drive module are in place. Error Code 15 Hex in the error list.

12-12




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


Right drive current feedback from the drive control was higher than the command fromthe CPU board.



Right drive current feedback from the drive control was lower than the command from the CPU board.



One or both handle signals were out of range. This indicates a potential circuit problem.

Calibrate the handle if the error occurs when the handle is pushed all the way forward or pulled all the way back. Make sure that the handle is pushed all the way forward to the stop and pulled all the way back to the stop during calibration. Check connectors and wiring to the drive handle transducers. Check the feedback buffers on the CPU. TP-15 on CPU should be +10 volts. Check that the +10V supply from the CPU to the transducers is intact. Check the data acquisition circuitry; analog MUX, sample and hold, and Analog to Digital converter. Error Code 18 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 320 Generator Fault

The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed when attempting to light field lamp.

Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal does not go “high” when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ INV RELAY must both be asserted) Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86 FET’s case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should be greater than 2 megohm. Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller Board. Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board. Error Code 20 Hex in the error list.

12-13




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


The 60 Hz inverter feedback failed after the field lamp was turned on.

Check 60 HZ EN and 60 HZ INV RELAY signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Determine why 60HZ INV OK signal goes “low” after the 60Hz inverter is turned on. (60HZ EN and 60HZ INV RELAY must both be asserted). Check Rotor Controller Board AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86 FET’s case to ground with J2 removed, resistance should be greater than 2 megohm. Check drivers at TP-4 and TP-5 on the Rotor Controller Board. Check 6 amp fuse on the Rotor Controller Board. Error Code 21 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 322 Battery Fault

Battery voltage is less than 90 volts. Feedback circuit is probably defective.

Check signals of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check CPU connection to the charger board. If battery voltage when measured with a DVM indicates voltage is truly below 90V, the batteries should be replaced. Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz per battery volt. Error Code 22 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 326 Battery Fault

Battery voltage went above 150 volts indicating a probable feedback circuit fault.

Check BAT & CHARGE CUR SEL signals of the Charger and Drive Control port on sheet 4 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check VCO frequency to CPU. Should be from 55 to 75 Hz per battery volt. Error Code 26 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 42F Calibration Fault

A fault occurred with the auto calibration data base. RAM is most likely defective. Power up and Calibration error prompts may provide additional information.

Recalibration is required to clear this fault. Error Code 2F Hex in the error list.


The Rotor Interlock Feedback signal was active during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 and ROTOR SELECT signal of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Are the 60hz clocks at FETS AMX1-A3-A2 Q85 and Q86? Does relay AMX1-A3-A2-K39 pull in? Is the rotor ok? Error Code 30 Hex in the error list.


The kVp Demand Feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? DAC output correct? Is it approximately 0.069 volts per kVp. Is the analog multiplexer working correctly? Error Code 31 Hex in the error list.

12-14




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


The Filament Current Demand Feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? Does the filament inverter turn on? The filament current feedback must be within 0.69 volts of the command from the CPU. Use 3.0V for PROMS 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 and later. Error Code 32 Hex in the error list.


Leakage Compensation Command feedback was high after command was output during the prep cycle.

Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board. Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at 125 kVp. Connector intact from CPU to filament control board? The leakage compensation feedback must be within 0.2 volts of the command from the CPU. Error Code 33 Hex in the error list.


Tap Feedback did not correspond with taps selected during the prep cycle.

Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signal of the Generator and AEC Control port on sheet 3 location A 5 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Error Code 35 Hex in the error list.


The X-RAY ON status signal was asserted in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep cycle.

Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check XRAY ON circuit from filament/kVp control board to the CPU. Error Code 36 Hex in the error list.


Back Up Timer Ok status signal was not asserted in pre-exposure interlock check during the prep cycle. This error will follow a 466 error.

Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8of the CPU schematic. Was X-RAY ON asserted at some time other than during an exposure (by noise perhaps)? This would be the case if the error log does not have 66 codes. Check for loose or missing ground connections in the generator and high voltage circuits. Error Code 37 Hex in the error list.


The X-ray On status signal was not asserted within two milliseconds after the Exposure Start Command signal was asserted.

Check EXP START CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 and X-RAY ON signals of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the start command get to the inverter? Does the safety contactor pull in? Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what was selected? Do the correct tap relays pull in? Check the XRAY ON circuitry. Check kVp feedback circuitry. Error Code 39 Hex in the error list.

12-15




Probable Cause

Recommended Action

ERROR 43A Generator Fault

Rotor Interlock feedback was low during the exposure interlock check.

Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status Port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic, and ROTOR SELECT* signals of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Is 60Hz inverter functioning? Check feedback circuits. Error Code 3A Hex in the error list.

ERROR 43B Generator Fault

Tap feedback did not correspond with the taps selected during the exposure interlock check.

Check TAP1* through TAP6* of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic, and TAP 1 FDBK through TAP 6 FDBK of the Generator and AEC Status Port on sheet 3 location E 7 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board. Error Code 3B Hex in the error list.

ERROR 43D Generator Fault

During the exposure interlock check, KVP DMN FDBK was high.

Check KVP DMN FDBK+ and KVP DMN FDBK- on sheet 5 location E 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check feedback circuitry. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Error Code 3D Hex in the error list.

ERROR 43E Generator Fault

During the exposure interlock check, FIL FDBK was high.(Only displayed after 100 occurrences)

Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required. Check the feedback circuitry. Error Code 3E Hex in the error list.


The X-Ray On signal did not become in–active within two milliseconds after the Exposure Stop Command. This error will be immediately followed by the breaker tripping.

Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 and EXP START CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Check that the kVp cal jumper is not installed. Does the stop command get to the stop SCR? Error Code 43 Hex in the error list.

12-16



TABLE 12–3 (CONT.) APPLICATIONS ERROR CODES Error Number ERROR 450 Generator Fault

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

For non–Orion x–ray tubes: The tube pressure switch was open during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check. For Orion x–ray tubes only: The tube temperature switch was open during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

Check X-RAY PRESS SW signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. For non–Orion x–ray tubes only: Check the connection from the CPU to the pressure switch. For Orion x–ray tubes only: Check the connection from the CPU to the temperature switch. Check for a faulty switch. Check the receiving circuits on the CPU. Error Code 50 Hex in the error list.


The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was high and the field light was not on during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 53 Hex in the error list.


The 1k Hz Inverter Ready signal was high and the field light was not on during the prep cycle pre-exposure interlock check.

Check 1KHZ INVERTER OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz inverter board. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 54 Hex in the error list.


Tap select feedback indicated one or more taps were active when none were selected.

Check TAP1 FDBK through TAP6 FDBK signals of the Generator and AEC Status port on sheet 3 location 7 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the 1kHz board. Check tap select circuitry on the 1kHz board. Check wiring to tap relay coils. Check tap select signal receivers on the CPU board. Error Code 56 Hex in the error list.


The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was not asserted when 60 Hz inverter was turned on during the prep cycle.

Check 60HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 57 Hex in the error list.


Rotor Interlock Feedback was not asserted when 60 Hz inverter was turned on during prep cycle.

Check ROTOR INTLK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8, and ROTOR SELECT signal of the Generator Control 2 port on sheet 4 location B 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check that the rotor select relay pulls in. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 58 Hex in the error list.

12-17




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


The kVp Command Feedback was low after command was output during the prep cycle.

Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Check feedback circuitry. Error Code 59 Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45A Generator Fault

LEAKAGE COMP FDBK was low after the command was output during the prep cycle.

Check LEAKAGE COMP FDBK+ and LEAKAGE COMP FDBK- on sheet 5 location H 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check drive level from the CPU to the filamentboard. Should be about 0.0V at 50 kVp, 0.4V at 80 kVp and 1.3V at 125 kVp. Check feedback circuitry. Error Code 5A Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45B Generator Fault

FIL FDBK was low after the command was output during the prep cycle.

Check FIL FDBK+ and FIL FDBK- on sheet 5 location F 1 of the CPU schematic. Check AMUX1 AMUX2, and AMUX3 signal of the A/D Control port on sheet 5 location E 6 of the CPU schematic. Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check that the voltage across R188 on the filament/kVp control board is 0.45 to 0.55V. Is the 60Hz inverter running properly? The voltage across AMX1-A4-C6 should be approximately 27 Volts when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. Error Code 5B Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45C Generator Fault

The 1 kHz inverter ready signal was not asserted after the 60 Hz inverter turned on during prep.

Check 1kHz INVERTER READY signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 1kHz board. Check that the 60Hz inverter turns on. Check that AMX1-A4-C2 charges to at least 70VDC when the 60Hz inverter is turned on. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 5C Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45D Generator Fault

Filament shorted signal was asserted during the prep cycle.

Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Check R150 on CPU 46–232828 or R321 on CPU 46–264974. Error Code 5D Hex in the error list.

12-18




Probable Cause

Recommended Action

ERROR 45E Generator Fault

Filament shorted signal failed to be asserted when the filament driver was turned on during prep. Because its resistance is low initially (cold), the filament should appear to be shorted for a short while when the inverter is first turned on.

Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the filament inverter turn on? Are the high voltage cables connected correctly? Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Is the filament open? Error Code 5E Hex in the error list.

ERROR 45F Generator Fault

Filament shorted signal did not go low after the filament was allowed to heat up during prep. Anode/Cathode cables reversed.

Check FIL SHRT DETECT signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Are the high voltage cables reversed? Is the filament drive sufficient? The small filament should be selected in the high voltage transformer. Check the circuitry associated with this signal. Error Code 5F Hex in the error list.


Tube Pressure Switch opened during exposure interlock check.

Check X-RAY PRESSURE SW signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the pressure switch. Check for a faulty switch. Check the receiving circuits on the CPU. Did the switch really trip due to high pressure or low pressure? Error Code 60 Hex in the error list.


The 60 Hz Inverter Ok signal was low during exposure interlock check.

Check 60 HZ INV OK signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check the connection from the CPU to the 60Hz inverter. Check for faulty feedback circuitry. Error Code 61 Hex in the error list.


Exposure time was excessive according to the programmable interval timer count. The exposure was terminated before mAs timer expired.

Check LOW RESOLUTION signals of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet 6 location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Error Code 62 Hex in the error list.


The kVp Command Feedback was low during the exposure interlock check.

Check connection to the filament/kVp board. Check feedback circuitry. Check drive level from the CPU to the filament board. Should be about 0.069 volts per kVp. Error Code 63 Hex in the error list.

12-19




Probable Cause

Recommended Action


Filament Current Command Feedback was low during exposure interlock check. (Only display after 100 occurrences)

Is there excessive battery voltage drop during a long exposure? Check battery voltage drop. See Section 14-1. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Check the feedback circuitry. Error Code 65 Hex in the error list.


Hardware back up timer expired. Error 437 will occur during the next prep attempt.

Check BU TMR OKAY signal of the On Board Status port on sheet 4 location F 8 of the CPU schematic. Does the XRAY ON signal oscillate when the exposure is terminated. Is there excessive noise in the unit which that trips flip-flop U120A on CPU 46–232828 or U95 on CPU 46–264974 Are all grounds properly connected in the generator. Error Code 66 Hex in the error list.


Exposure was determined to be short.

Check FREQ FDBK0 signal of the On Board Control port on sheet 5 location B 9 of the CPU schematic. Is the unit properly calibrated? (If the initial kVp is off by more than 8% a recalibration is required.) Is the mA excessively high (i.e. greater than 125 mA)? Check preheat circuitry on CPU board and Fil/kVp board. Error Code 67 Hex in the error list.


The Exposure Command Active status signal was high after Exposure Stop Command was given.

Check EXP STOP CMND signal of the Generator Control 1 port on sheet location B 7 of the CPU schematic. Does the EXP STOP CMND properly reset: U144B on CPU 46–232828 or U140 on CPU 46–264974 Check the circuits related to this signal. Error Code 68 Hex in the error list.


The X-Ray On status went low during the exposure.

Check X-RAY ON signal of the Critical Status port on sheet 3 location D 8 of the CPU schematic. Check circuitry related to this circuit. (i.e. does the signal oscillate during the exposure when it should be a solid high?) During Calibration: Does the start command get to the inverter? Does the safety contactor pull in? Is high voltage produced? If so, is the resulting kVp what was selected? Do the correct tap relays pull in? Check kV feedback signal. It should look like the signal from the High Voltage Divider. Error Code 69 Hex in the error list.

12-20



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 13 THEORY 13-1

Power–up Diagnostics The power–up diagnostic firmware is responsible for verifying the integrity of the following major functions/components:

13-2

The 80C31 microcontroller.

The program code EPROM checksum.

The non–volatile RAM battery.

The RAM external to the microcontroller.

The calibration data checksum.

The watchdog timer.

The programmable timers external to the microcontroller.

The A/D converter circuitry and power supplies.

Visual Indication Of Testing As the power up tests are executing, message display indicates the various test numbers. It takes the following form: TEST - xx yyyyyy where xx is the test number from 01 – 07 and yyyyyy is PASSED if the test passed or FAILED if it did not. There are 8 Light Emitting Diodes on the CPU board which light to indicate which test is being executed. Upon power–up or reset, all LED’s are lit. Once the tests begin to execute, the lit LED’s represent the binary code of the test being executed. Note that test 0, the CPU test, is not indicated on the alpha display, but is represented on the LED ’s when all are turned off. The prompt TESTING COMPLETE displays upon completion of the testing if a fatal power–up fault was not detected.

13-3

Power Up Tests Testing is done in a confidence building manner. If a test fails, a failure indication is given. If the failure is fatal, program execution stops. If the test is non–fatal, testing continues after a brief delay while the failure prompt is given. If a test passes, the next power–up test is executed. This sequencing continues until a fatal fault occurs or all the tests of been successfully executed. Control is passed to the Application Code, Calibration Code, or Diagnostics. When the intended operating mode is the application code, non–fatal faults are those faults which do not directly effect the drives. Should a non –fatal fault be detected, x–ray and charging will be inhibited and the message DRIVES ONLY displays when the application mode is entered. This provision is incorporated to allow the unit to be moved to a convenient area for servicing if the drive circuits appear to be functional. In order to access diagnostics, the service switch must be set before the TESTING COMPLETE message finishes displaying. Functional descriptions for each of the power–up tests are given in the following paragraphs. 13-1



80C31 Microcontroller Tests (test – 00) Testing the 80C31 Microcontroller involves verifying the functionality of each of the following:

CPU registers and timers

data transfers

arithmetic operations

logical operations

boolean variable manipulations

program branching

This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-5

EPROM Checksum Test (test – 01) The sum for the first 65535 bytes of program code is calculated and checked to make sure it is equal to the 65536th byte. This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-6

Ram Battery Test (test – 02) This test checks the integrity of the non–volatile ram battery. If the ram battery is below 2.0 volts, the first write to ram after power up will not be executed. This fact is used to determine the state of the battery. Note:

13-7

For CPU Board 46-264974, the second RAM battery is protected by checkĆ sum.

External Ram Test (test – 03) The external ram test is non–destructive and involves writing and reading the patterns 00, FF, AA and 55 for each RAM location. In addition, a destructive addressing test is done on the RAM locations not allocated to the non–volatile database. This test is FATAL regardless of firmware set or intended operating mode.

13-8

Calibration Data Checksum Test (test – 04) The checksum for the calibration data is calculated and checked to make sure it is equal to the checksum value stored in non–volatile memory. This test is non–fatal if the calibration or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It is non–fatal for the application mode only if the handle calibration data checksums are ok.

13-2



13-8-1 Checksum By–pass On occasions, troubleshooting errors that occur during calibration can be more efficient if done in the applications mode. However, unless the unit is totally calibrated it will not allow normal applications operation. This is where the checksum by–pass is useful. The following diagram illustrates how this is done: Note:

Before proceeding with the checksum bypass, enter calibration made and see which checksums have failed. If for instance, the drive checksum failed, a quick cal might resolve the problem.

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE IN THE “RUN” POSITION BEFORE POWER IS TURNED ON.

POWER OFF POWER ON TEST 00

TEST 01

TEST 02

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO THE “SERVICE” POSITION BEFORE “TEST 04 – FAILED” IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.

TEST 03

TEST 04 - FAILED

TEST 05

SERVICE SWITCH MUST BE SWITCHED TO THE “RUN” POSITION SOMEWHERE IN THIS TIME FRAME BEFORE “TESTING COMPLETE” IS FINISHED DISPLAYING.

TEST 06

TEST 07

TESTING COMPLETE

ENTER APPLICATION MODE WITH ALL FUNCTIONS ENABLED

13-3



Watchdog Timer Test (test – 05) The watchdog timer is checked to make sure that when strobed, its output goes high within 100 us, stays high for at least 30 ms and goes low within 75 ms. This test is non–fatal for any intended operating mode.

13-10

Programmable Interval Timer Test (test – 06) This test checks the functionality of the 82C54 timers 0 and 2, including the ability to count and to provide the proper strobe on their outputs. This test is non–fatal for any intended operating mode.

13-11

A/D Converter Circuitry Test (test – 07) This test checks the functionality of the A/D converter, the sample and hold and the analog multiplexer. In addition, the integrity of the processor +5V supply is verified in this test. This test is non–fatal if the calibration or extended diagnostics modes are to be accessed. It is fatal for the application mode (15V and +24V also tested if dip switch #3 is enabled on CPU Board 46–264974, starting with firmware 46–302688G1/46–302687G1).

13-12

Application Mode The application mode consists of the functions that the hospital personnel typically encounter, i.e. Charging, Driving and X–ray.

13-4



REV 11 13-13

DIRECTION 46-017207 Charge Control

13-13-1 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1, 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 and 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration 13–1 shows a typical charge profile. ILLUSTRATION 13–1 TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1, 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 (EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE) TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 20TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

120V 110V

CHARGE COMPLETE

2.25 BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

BATTERY CHARGE CURRENT (AMPS)

2.0A

1.5A 1.0A CHARGE COMPLETE

0.5A 0.0A

0

1 2 TIME (HRS)

3

4

5

13-5

6

7

8

9

10



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 Every 20th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 13–2 ).

ILLUSTRATION 13–2 TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46–302688G1/46–302687G1, 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 AND 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 (EVERY 20TH CYCLE) TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE (EVERY 20TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE



2.0A

1.5A 1.0A

CHARGE COMPLETE

0.5A 0.0A

0

1 2 TIME (HRS)

3

4

5

13-6

6

7

8

9

10



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-13-2 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 Charging can be entered from application code by plugging in the line cord. Illustration 13–3 shows a typical charge profile. ILLUSTRATION 13–3 TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE) TYPICAL CHARGING PROFILE, (EXCEPT EVERY 10TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

120V 110V

CHARGE COMPLETE



2.0A

1.5A 1.0A CHARGE COMPLETE

0.5A 0.0A

0

1 2 TIME (HRS)

3

4

5

13-7

6

7

8

9

10



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 Every 10th cycle, a complete charge will occur (see Illustration 13–4).

ILLUSTRATION 13–4 TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316886G1 (EVERY 10TH CYCLE) TYPICAL COMPLETE CHARGE PROFILE, EVERY 10TH CYCLE) BATTERY VOLTAGE & CHARGING CURRENT VS. TIME

BATTERY VOLTAGE

130V

BATTERY VOLTAGE

120V 110V CHARGE COMPLETE



2.0A

1.5A 1.0A

CHARGE COMPLETE

0.5A 0.0A

0

1 2 TIME (HRS)

3

4

5

13-8

6

7

8

9

10



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-13-3 Charge Control Algorithm for PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2 Charging can be entered from the application mode by plugging in the line cord. The AMX4 charger can be classified as a pseudo constant voltage charger. This is because the charger hardware is actually designed for constant current charging but the firmware strives to maintain a constant voltage by adjusting the charger current output. Illustrations 13–5 through 13–8 show various aspects of actual charge profiles. Profiles will vary with state– of–charge, battery condition, etc. Illustrations 13–5 through 13–8 show only a small sample of the possible charge scenarios. The intent here is to present the most significant elements of the charging algorithm and how the various charge control DATA BASE parameters would effect charge performance. Even though the details of Illustrations 13–5 through 13–8 apply specifically to PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2, the concepts presented are valid for all PROM versions. A charge cycle can be either a non–extended (top–off) or an extended cycle. Most cycles will be of the non–extended type as seen in Illustration 13–5. However, every n+1 times that charge is initiated, the AMX4 charger will automatically attempt an extended charge as shown in Illustration 13–7. (n = the value of the DATA BASE parameter “Trickle Limit”). An extended charge is considered valid once 1/2 of the extended time has elapsed. If this condition is not met because the charger is unplugged, the system will continue to initiate extended charges.

13-9



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–5 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL NON–EXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

BATTERY VOLTAGE

VOLTAGE ACROSS CHARGE RESISTOR AMX1A3R1

Battery Voltage (VOLTS)

Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)

TYPICAL NON-EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

CHARGER OFF

SWITCH TO TRICKLE MODE

CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29

A"

TIME FRAMES – SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW

B"

D"

C"

E"

F"

...

TIME (Hours) Illustration 13–5 shows a typical non–extended charge profile. About 50% of the usable capacity of the batteries was removed prior to charge. The graph plots battery voltage vs. charge current. Charge current is represented two ways: by the voltage across the charging resistor, and by the voltage out of the charge current demand DAC. Actual current can be calculated by dividing the voltage across AMX1A3R1 by 2.5W. The various charge time frames are as follows: TIME FRAME “A”: This is the charge start–up period. The charge current is increased to the maximum allowable level for the present set of conditions (battery state–of–charge, line voltage, etc.). See Illustration 13–6 for an expansion of this time frame. TIME FRAME “B”: This is the current limited period. The level that the charge current is limited to is determined by the DATA BASE parameter “Maximum Charging mA”. The charger will remain at this level until the battery voltage starts to approach the clamp voltage. NOTE: This time frame will be by–passed for charge cycles which are initiated when the batteries are nearly fully charged. 13-10



TIME FRAME “C”: This is the clamp anticipation period. During this time frame, the charger decreases the charge current in anticipation of the voltage clamp. Clamp anticipation begins at a voltage 7.0V below the voltage set by the DATA BASE parameter “High Charge Clamp Volts”. The rate of charge current decrease is a function of the rate of battery voltage increase. Clamp anticipation is incorporated to minimize clamp voltage overshoot. TIME FRAME “D”: This is the voltage limited period which begins once the voltage set by the value of the DATA BASE parameter “High Charge Clamp Volts” is exceeded. During this time some ripple will be noticeable on the voltage waveform. This ripple is due to the limited resolution of the digital–to–analog convertor which controls charge current. The duration of this time period is variable depending on the state–of–charge of the batteries prior to charge as well as over all battery condition. This time frame ends, as does the “High Charge Mode”, when the charge current drops to the level set by the DATA BASE parameter “Start Timed Charge Counts”. TIME FRAME “E”: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to “Trickle Mode” is made. When the charger is in the trickle mode, the resolution of the system increases by a factor of 10. This is the reason for the sudden increase of voltage at AMX1A2A1 TP29 by an order of magnitude. (Note, however, that the voltage across the AMX1A3R1 charging resistor doesn’t change appreciably.) During the initial stages of this time period, the battery voltage may increase (as shown in Illustration 13–1 ). This is because a one count change of the charge DAC does not have the same affect in the trickle mode as in the high charge mode. The firmware decreases the current by one DAC count once every two minutes as long as the voltage remains less than two volts above the clamp level, and once every 15 seconds if the voltage is more than two volts but less than five volts over the clamp. If the battery voltage exceeds the clamp by more than five volts, the firmware will drop the charge current to zero for 15 seconds and then reapply it at a lower level. This period ends when the amount of time equal to the DATA BASE parameter “TOP OFF TIME” in minutes has elapsed and charge current is brought to zero. TIME FRAME “F”: This is the “CHARGE COMPLETE” period. The charger output is zero, the system electronics are powered from the A.C. line, and “CHARGE COMPLETE” is displayed on the message display. The system will remain in this state until the system is unplugged from its AC outlet. If during this time period the battery voltage falls below the level set by the DATA BASE parameter “Monitor Full Capacity Millivolts”, the firmware will trip the circuit breaker to conserve charge if the system has been in the “CHARGE COMPLETE” mode for at least the amount of time specified by the DATA BASE parameter “Breaker Trip Time”. One of three conditions can cause this to occur. First, the battery set can have one or more shorted cells each decreasing the voltage by approximately 2 volts. Second, the regulator circuit which supplies power to the system electronics may be defective, forcing the battery to supply this power. Finally the breaker might trip if the system is left in the “CHARGE COMPLETE” mode for many days, because of the battery’s own self–discharge.

13-11



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–6 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE START–UP PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

BATTERY VOLTAGE


Charge Resistor and Charge DAC (VOL TS)

TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE FOR SIGNIFICANTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

VOLTAGE ACROSS CHARGE RESISTOR AMX1A3R1


TIME (Minutes) Illustration 13–6 shows in detail what occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle. When the system first senses that the charge cord has been plugged in, it sets the Charge Current DAC to its appropriate level and then closes the charge enable relays (K150 and K187) on the charge board AMX1A3A1. Charge current is maintained at this initial level for approximately 75 seconds to allow for stabilization. The Charge Current DAC output is then increased at a rate of 9 DAC counts per 18 seconds until the maximum current level (set by the DATA BASE parameter “Maximum Charging mA”) is reached. See Illustration 13–8 for a case where the charge current does not ramp up to its maximum level.

13-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–7 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGING PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

TYPICAL EXTENDED CHARGE PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)


Charge DAC (VOLTS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

SWITCH TO FLOAT CHARGE CHARGE CURRENT DAC VOLTAGE AMX1A2A1 TP29

SWITCH TO TRICKLE MODE

TIME FRAMES – SEE DESCRIPTION BELOW B"

A"

C"

...

TIME (Hours) The profile in Illustration 13–7 shows what occurs when a battery which has been only slightly discharged is recharged. Because the battery quickly becomes resistant to charge, its voltage climbs at a fast rate and generally over–shoots the clamp voltage as shown. TIME FRAME “A”: This is the “High Charge Mode”. See Illustration 13–8 for an expansion and detailed description of this time frame. TIME FRAME “B”: This is the timed charge period which begins when the switch to “Trickle Mode” is made. For an extended charge this timed charge ends when the amount of time equal to the DATA BASE parameter “Final Phase Time” in hours has elapsed. The charger maintains the battery voltage at the clamp level by slowly decreasing the current. TIME FRAME “C”: This is the “CHARGE COMPLETE” period for an extended charge. The charger enters a float charge condition, and charger output is adjusted to maintain the battery voltage at the level determined by the DATA BASE parameter “Trickle Charge Clamp Voltage”. This voltage will be maintained until the charge cord is removed from its AC outlet.

13-13



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–8 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: TYPICAL CHARGE START–UP PROFILE FOR A SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET

Charge DAC (VOLTS)

BATTERY VOLTAGE



TYPICAL CHARGE START-UP PROFILE FOR SLIGHTLY DISCHARGED BATTERY SET (BATTERY VOLTAGE VS. CHARGE CURRENT)

TIME (Minutes) Illustration 13–8 shows what occurs when a nearly charged battery is recharged. Charge is initiated as described for Illustration 13–6, except that the current never reaches its maximum level because current stops increasing when the battery voltage exceeds the clamp voltage minus seven volts (123V in this case). The charger now enters a clamp anticipation phase as indicated by the Time Frame “C” description for Illustration 13–5. Once the clamp voltage is exceeded, the charge current decreases at a rate of 1 DAC count every six seconds if the voltage is increasing at a rate greater than 0.2V in six seconds. Otherwise, charge current is decreased at a rate of 1 DAC count every 40 seconds. If the clamp voltage is exceeded by more than 2.00V, the firmware brings the charge current demand to zero for 15 seconds to force the battery voltage to drop before the charge current is reapplied at a level 3 DAC counts lower. If the battery voltage needs to be dropped more than 4 times within a 4 minute window, the charge current is reapplied at a level 10 DAC counts lower.

13-14



Battery Charge Diagnostics

13-14-1 Battery Charger Run–Time Diagnostics Checking charge current feedback. The actual feedback must be within 20% of the expected feedback otherwise an error is flagged. Checking to see if the charger is saturated. During the high current charging phase, the charger is assumed to be saturated if the charge current feedback is approximately 6% lower than the expected value. Charger saturation occurs when the charger can not meet the charge current demand. Usually this takes place toward the end of a charge cycle when the battery voltage is high (head voltage is low). When saturation is detected, charge current demand is decreased. 13-14-2 Charging Diagnostics Display (Applies to PROMS 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and Later) If the service switch is placed into the “service” or down position while the system is charging, the current battery voltage and charger current are displayed on the kVp/mAs numeric display. The display takes the formats of Illustration 13–9. ILLUSTRATION 13–9 CHARGING DIAGNOSTICS DISPLAY

CHARGER CURRENT DISPLAY

BATTERY VOLTAGE DISPLAY

Note:

13-15

The display is only updated once every six seconds and the displayed values lag the actual values because of voltage and current averaging inherent in the AMX4 metering circuits and algorithms. With the battery volt meter and charger properly calibrated, errors up to 1% for the battery voltage and 5% for the charge current are possible.

Drive

13-15-1 Drive Control The drive mode is entered from application code whenever the drive handle is engaged and is exited when the handle is released. The Drive Control Algorithm converts the drive handle input to a drive command, allowing “reverse only” if the bumper is engaged. It sends the status of the x–ray tube parked switch to the drive control board.

13-15



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–10 DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

DRIVE DAC OUTPUT VS. HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

(0) 255

DRIVE DAC COMMAND (COUNTS) (128) 128

DEADBAND

(255) 0 HALL SENSOR OUTPUT @ FULL REVERSE HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

HALL SENSOR OUTPUT WITH NO HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

HALL SENSOR OUTPUT @ FULL FORWARD HANDLE DISPLACEMENT

From the graph on Illustration 13–10 it becomes apparent the any handle input will map the appropriate output drive command. It should be noted that the left and right channels are independent from one another. Drive Control Run–Time Diagnostics in the main drive control loop check drive current feedback to see that it is equal to or less than the drive command. Checks for drive stalls and stuck handle are also done. 13-15-2 Drive Diagnostics Using the Run–Time Diagnostic Drive Display to Isolate Drive Errors. Firmware includes diagnostics which display drive command and feedback for both left and right drives on the kVp mAs display. The displays are activated any time the service switch is active when the unit is in the drive mode. The displays are activated any time the service switch is active when the unit is in the drive mode. The display format is as follows: 0

1 LEFT OUTPUT

2

3

4

LEFT FEEDBACK

13-16

RIGHT OUTPUT

5

6

7

RIGHT FEEDBACK



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 The displays change very fast but you should be able to notice trends. That is, as the output increases so should the feedback and when the output decreases the feedback should follow. The only time the feedback equals the output is when the drive power amp is not pulse width limited which only occurs when the unit is accelerating from stop and when driving very slowly. Note that the data is displayed in hex and that because of the bipolar operation of the drives a request for no drive corresponds to 80 (HEX) on the display. Keeping this in mind, the feedback should always be on the same side of 80 as the Output command (+ a couple counts). If a drive fault should occur, the firmware “locks” the fault condition on the display as long as the drive deadman switch is held active. This will allow you to record the display so that you can interpret what it means. The display is especially helpful in isolating blown fuses or bad connections to the drive motors. If either of these conditions were present you would see the feedback remain constant while the output command is very active. Conditions which are detected as faults: 1. Current feedback indicating drive in the opposite direction from what was commanded. 2. Current feedback in excess of what was commanded. 3. Current feedback which doesn’t exceed 10% of the output command for at least 100 ms. Remember:

For commands above 80H, the larger the number the greater the output comĆ mand. For commands below 80H, the smaller the number the greater the outĆ put command. Also, the output commands displayed are scaled down by 63% from the actual output so that they correspond to the feedback.

13-17



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-15-3 Drive Control Software Theory

HOW SOFTWARE CONTROLS THE AMX DRIVE Note:

For the following theory, refer to Section 15, Illustration 15-8, Left & Right Drive Functional Flow". WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE HALL EFFECT SENSORS: The AMX software looks for certain voltages from the Hall effect sensors in the Drive handle:

The voltages from the Hall effect sensors enter the CPU via analog MUX U342. They can be measured at CPU TP22 (left handle) or TP21 (right handle). They must be as follows, or calibration errors will occur: - With handle at rest, this voltage should be between 3.125 and 7.5 VDC. - Move handle full forward, and voltage should change in either direction by at least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. Direction is not important since this depends on magnet polarity and is calibrated out. - Move handle full reverse, and voltage should change in other direction by at least .32 Volts, but no more than 5 Volts. The voltage must change in the OTHER direction, or a HANDLE CAL ERR 4 will occur.

Always push full forward and pull full back during calibration. Otherwise, the CPU may see a greater or lesser voltage than expected during applications, and cause a 218 error.

During applications, the software looks at the Hall sensor voltage and does some calculations based on data gathered during handle calibration. The calculations convert the approximately 3–7 Volt Hall signal into a –10 to +10 Volt signal used as the Drive Command to the drive servo. This command is the output from a D/A converter and can be seen on TP19 (left drive) and TP18 (right drive). A 0 Volt command is a command for no motion, while a + or – command provides drive in a forward or reverse direction.

If there is no voltage change at Test Points 21 or 22, explore the Handle Check signal.

WHAT THE HANDLE CHECK SIGNAL IS FOR: The AMX CPU makes the handle check signal from a D/A output that is normally used for the Charge Current Command. While AMX is driven, it cannot charge, so this D/A performs double duty.

The Handle Check signal is at CPU TP29. This should measure about 10 Volts with a meter. When the drive enable bar is engaged, the signal is actually a square wave that is 10 Volts for 24 mS and 0 Volts for 1 mS. When this signal drops to zero, it forces the signal from the Hall sensor to zero. The signal is continuously 10 Volts when the enable bar is released.

13-18



During driving, the CPU looks for the drop to zero Volts once every 24 ms. During the 24 ms in between, the CPU can get the actual handle command. If this zero Volt drop is missing, there will be a 218 error. This is a safety feature to guarantee that the analog MUX, Sample and Hold, and A/D are working correctly while driving, in order to prevent runaway of the AMX.

WHAT SOFTWARE WANTS TO SEE FROM THE DRIVE FEEDBACK SIGNAL: The CPU expects certain voltages from the drive servo’s Drive Feedback signal that is input to the CPU at PIN 25 (left drive) and PIN 26 (right drive) of analog MUX U342.

The Drive Command from CPU is a –10 to +10 Volt command with 0 Volts meaning “do not drive.” The feedback that should be seen from the servo is calculated by the following formula: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((Drive Command x 0.625) x 0.5) Thus there is a Drive Command that goes above and below 0 Volts which produces a feedback that goes above and below 5 Volts.

The software looks at this feedback whenever the enable bar is picked up. An error occurs if any of the following happens: - The feedback is in opposite direction of what is expected: For example, if command is less than 0, feedback should be less than 5 Volts. If feedback is greater than 5 Volts, this is instantly an error. - The feedback is greater than expected: For example, if the Drive Command is 4 Volts, feedback should be: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 6.25 Volts Thus if feedback is greater than 6.25 Volts, there is a 214 or 216 error. - The feedback based upon 10% of command is less than expected for more than 100 ms: For example, using the 4 Volt command above, 10% of 4 is 0.4 Volts, so feedĆ back should be at least: Feedback Voltage = 5 + ((0.4 x 0.625) x 0.5) = 5.125 Volts Thus, if feedback is less than 5.125 volts for more than 100 ms, there is a 215 or 217 error.

Monitor the command and feedback by flipping down the Service Switch while in applications mode. Lifting the enable bar should cause many digits to display on the kV/mA display. (There is a good description of this in Section 13–15–2 of this manual.) Note that the display for the command is scaled by the .625 (63%) factor so that the command and feedback will match.

13-19



The software looks at this feedback as soon as handle is lifted. When not driving, there should be about 5 Volts at PINS 25 and 26 of the MUX. If there isn’t about 5 Volts upon picking up the enable bar, there will be a “RELEASE HANDLE” or 214 thru 217 error. This can be an aid in troubleshooting. If there is an error by just pulling up the enable bar, it means that feedback was never correct, and the problem is probably the CPU or Drive Controller. If handle has to be moved to get error, there is probably a blown fuse or bad Power Amp board. Usually the Power Amp Fails because a FET becomes shorted. This shorted FET will probably destroy a DG201 analog switch on the Drive Controller (U31 or U51), and blow a fuse (F1 or F2 by the drive contactors). Determine if the FET’s are shorted by measuring their impedance with an OHM meter. There should be at least 10K OHM between any combination of the case and the 2 leads. These FET’s are easy to replace.

Note:

Never replace a drive controller board or a fuse without first checking to make sure that FET's are not shorted. Otherwise, a DG201 or a fuse will blow again! INPUT AND OUTPUT PORTS THAT EFFECT THE DRIVE: The CPU looks at several signals on the U151 Input port and sends out several signals on the U264 Output port.

INPUT PORT U151 - DRIVE ENA SW (PIN 13) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that Drive Enable Bar is engaged. - TUBE PARKED SW (PIN 18) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that tube is parked. - BUMPER (PIN 3) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that front bumper has hit someĆ thing. - STALL (PIN 4 OR 7) Ċ When low, it tells CPU that Drive Controller senses too much motor current.

OUTPUT PORT U264 - MOTOR ENA (PIN 5) -- When this goes high, it releases the brakes and energizes the drive contactors. (Drive enable bar must also be engaged for brakes and contactor to work.) The software looks for Drive enable bar to be engaged, for no stall, and for no bumper with a forward drive command. - DRIVE RESET (PIN 6) -- This pulses high to reset the stall latches on the Drive Controller board whenever enable bar is pulled up. - FULL SPD ENA (PIN 19) -- When high, it allows full speed. The software looks for tube to be parked, and for front bumper to be released to allow full speed.

13-20



REV 11 13-16

DIRECTION 46-017207 Generator Control

13-16-1 Generator Control Algorithm Following is a sequence of events for a no error x–ray cycle: 1. Prep switch is pressed. 2. 60Hz inverter is turned off if the field light was on (this prevents electrical noise when the rotor relay is switched in). 3. Check critical status interlocks. 4. Turn on the 60Hz inverter (rotor). 5. Turn on filament inverter and boost the filament. 6. Output kVp DAC command. 7. Output leakage compensation DAC command. 8. Pull in the safety contactor. 9. Determine battery voltage. 10. Turn on the 1kHz inverter. 11. Output the required filament current command. 12. Select the appropriate tap relays. 13. Display “READY FOR X–RAY” 14. Expose switch is pressed. 15. mAs integrator is enabled. 16. Start exposure command is issued. 17. Auto Cal data is collected. 18. Interlocks are continuously checked during the exposure. 19. When the selected mAs is reached on the mAs integrator, the exposure is terminated (the “stop command” is issued) 20. All DAC outputs are set to “0”. 21. The 60Hz, 1kHz and 2kHz Inverters are turned off. 22. Adjust filament current demand database using Auto Cal data. 23. Turn off rotor and tap select relays. 24. Wait for Prep Switch to be released. 13-16-2 Selecting The Proper KVp Demand The correct kVp, demand is determined from the operator selected kVp and calibrated data base values. During kVp calibration, the relationship between 4 kVp demand DAC outputs and the resulting kVp is determined. All kVp demands are then linearly interpolated in between these database entries.

13-21



13-16-3 Selecting The Proper Tap Relay Combination The selected tap relay combination is a function of selected kVp, battery voltage and calibrated tap constants. The tap combination that will yield an average emission current closest to 100mA will be selected.

13-16-4 Selecting The Proper Filament Current Demand The proper filament current is determined using the selected kVp and the calculated emission current resulting from the selected tap relay combination. During filament current calibration the filament current at 90 and 110 mA of emission current is determined for each kVp station and stored in the database. A linear interpolation is done on these database elements using the calculated emission current to arrive at the proper filament current at the selected kVp.

13-16-5 Auto Calibration To compensate for tube aging and to “tweak” interpolated filament current points, auto calibration is done after all exposures longer than 10ms as follows:

Determine how much the filament current needs to be adjusted based on the initial kVp error of the last exposure.

Weight the filament current table adjustments based on the mA.

Adjust adjacent filament current table points to reflect the change made at the present station.

13-16-6 Generator Control Diagnostics (Fault Detection) During the PREP and EXPOSURE cycles, the firmware continuously checks the status of various interlocks. As a result, there 36 unique errors that can appear. All x–ray generator related faults are indicated by the message “ERROR 4xx”, where xx is a unique error code for a particular fault.

13-17

Field Light Control The field light can be turned on any time the unit is not charging or in the x–ray mode (prep or expose) provided a generator fault has not occurred. The field light is turned on by enabling the 60Hz clocks to the 60Hz inverter. The clocks remain enabled for from 5 to 45 seconds after the field light switch is released. Pressing the field light switch during the 5 to 45 second time period reloads the timer with the calibrated on time. The field light has a maximum total on time of 200 seconds before it is disabled for cooling.

13-22



REV 11 13-18

DIRECTION 46-017207 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–302688G1/46–302687G1 Capacity is determined as follows:

When Not Driving Or Charging NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

112.00V

100% **

116.00V OR GREATER

MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN. THE BAR GRAPH WILL GAIN SEGMENTS AT A RATE OF 0.6 BARS/MIN IN RESPONSE TO VOLTAGE FLUCTUATION

* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING. **THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

109.00V

100% ** 113.00V

Maximum rate of decrease is 3.0 bars/min The bar graph will not gain segments in this mode *

OR GREATER

THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. THE 100% VOLTAGE IS MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS – 3.0V.

When Charging # BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

85% 100% ***

114.00V

Maximum rate of increase is 3.0 bars/min during the voltage period and 0.011 bars/min during the timed charge period. The bar graph will not lose segments in this mode.

130.00V **

*

THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS MAY BE CHANGED BY THE BATTERY AGE ALGORITHM. THE 0% VOLTAGE IS EQUAL TO (MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS +2.00V.

**

THIS VALUE IS 130.00V.

*** ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 20TH TIME.

13-23



Bar Graph Control For Version 46–303272G1/46–303273G1 or 46–303815G1/46–303816G1 Capacity is determined as follows: When Not Driving Or Charging NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

112.00V

*

100% **

114.00V


THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING.

** THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving 0% *

109.00V *

NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

100% ** 111.00V

MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE

OR GREATER



When Charging # bars linear relation using voltages below

0% *

85% 100% ***

114.00V

MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE TIMED CHARGE PERIOD. THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE.

**

130.00V

*


**


***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 20TH TIME.

13-24



REV 11 13-20

DIRECTION 46-017207 Bar Graph Control For Version 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 Capacity is determined as follows: When Not Driving Or Charging NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

112.00V

100% **

114.00V


* THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_ZERO_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE. MAY BE MODIFIED BY BATTERY AGING. **THIS VOLTAGE LEVEL IS ADJUSTABLE WITH THE MONITOR_FULL_CAPACITY_MILLIVOLTS DATABASE VALUE.

When Driving NUMBER OF LIGHTED BARS IS A LINEAR RELATION DETERMINED BY THE VOLTAGES BELOW

0% *

109.00V *

100% ** 111.00V

MAXIMUM RATE OF DECREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT GAIN SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE

OR GREATER



When Charging 0% *

85%

# BARS LINEAR RELATION USING VOLTAGES BELOW

100% ***

114.00V

MAXIMUM RATE OF INCREASE IS 3.0 BARS/MIN DURING THE VOLTAGE PERIOD AND 0.011 BARS/MIN DURING THE TIMED CHARGE PERIOD. THE BAR GRAPH WILL NOT LOSE SEGMENTS IN THIS MODE.

**

127.00V

*


**


***ALL BARS SHOULD BE LIT SEVERAL MINUTES AFTER CHARGE COMPLETE (EXCEPT IN FULL CHARGE CYCLE WHICH OCCURS EVERY 10TH TIME.

13-25



REV 11 13-21

DIRECTION 46-017207 Battery Aging for Firmware 46–316685G1/46–316686G1 and Earlier Note:

For Firmware 46-329187G1/46-329188G1 46-329187G2/46-329188G2, see Section 13-22-6.

or

The battery aging algorithm may change the “monitor_zero_capacity_millivolts” to prevent potential error during exposure. This will make the minimum on the bar graph correspond to a voltage higher than 112V. (The normal bargraph range corresponds to 112V min. and 114V max.) The algorithm may be disabled and the range reset to norm by loading defaults, running full calibration, and loading location 19D with 0000. (See the data base access section). 13-22

Bar Graph Control For Version 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2/46–329188G2 (SMART GAUGE) This section describes the high–level operation of the battery capacity metering algorithm for the AMX–4 mobile rad product. This algorithm shall hereafter be referred to as “SMART GAUGE”. The SMART GAUGE firmware divorces the bar graph display from battery voltage and instead uses actual usage to approximate remaining capacity. This has the effect of normalizing all battery sets regardless of manufacturer or manufacturing date. It also allows the system to be relatively insensitive to bad cells as long as performance is still there.

13-22-1 Discharge Loads When the AMX–4 is “ON”, there are five distinct loads on the battery. They are idle, drive, field light, prep, and x–ray exposures. All load currents except for drive are relatively constant and can be integrated easily over time. To be conservative, the drive load is considered to be constant at a level equivalent to driving at top speed on a flat level surface. Note:

The additional load of the optional AEC module on the battery set is approxiĆ mately 5 mA. Since this value is so small, no special compensation is made for this case. Available capacity in milliamp hours is decreased from its present level as described by the follow equation: remaining capacity = remaining capacity – idle energy removed since last sample – drive energy removed since last sample – field light energy removed since last sample – prep energy removed since last sample – xray energy removed since last sample

13-26



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 The various energy removed values (in milliamp seconds) will be determined from elapsed time as follows: ENERGY REMOVED idle energy removed drive energy removed field light energy removed prep energy removed

ELAPSED TIME = {[Elapsed idle time] = {[Elapsed drive time] = {[Elapsed field light time] = {[Elapsed xray mode time]

NOMINAL LOAD

300 (mA)} 3000 (mA)} 2500(mA)} 3000(mA)}

Exposure energy removed (in mA seconds) will be determined from exposure data as follows: x-ray energy removed = {[Cumulative Exposure Energy since last sample (Joules)] (conversion factor) where, conversion factor =(1000 mA/A) [ 0.75 (generator eff.)100V (typ. loaded volts) ] = 13

These nominal loads are adjustable via DATA BASE parameters. The load to DATA BASE names are cross–referenced below: NOMINAL LOAD idle drive field light prep

DATA BASE PARAMETER Idle Load Current Drive Load Current Field Light Load Current Prep Load Current

The remaining capacity calculations are done each time a new battery voltage value is calculated which is approximately every five seconds. The % capacity remaining is then displayed on the 48 segment bargraph. The bargraph has the relationship of each segment representing: Total Capacity (a DATA BASE parameter) 48 segments Using the default conditions as an example we get: 6500 mAHR/48 seg = 135 mAHR per segment. Given this default condition, each of the various load modes will remove capacity at different rates as follows: LOAD MODE

LOAD MAGNITUDE

DISCHARGE RATE

TYPICAL DAILY USAGE*

Idle

0.3 amps

2.2 segments/hour

0.8 AHR = 6 segments

Drive

3.0 amps

0.4 segments/minute


Field Light

2.5 amps

0.3 segments/minute


X–Ray Prep

3.0 amps

0.4 segments/minute

0.1 AHR = 1 segment

X–ray

BASED ON TECHNIQUE

0.0005 to 0.8 segments/exposure


TOTAL DAILY SEGMENTS TURNED OFF: *Based on actual field data.

13-27

23 segments (48%)



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-22-2 Emergency Capacity In order to deal with the rare situation where a customer is nearly finished with a patient exam when capacity goes to 0 preventing further exposures, an emergency capacity feature is added. Upon power–up, if 0% capacity is detected, three bar segments will be lit. Thus cycling the keyswitch will give approximately 50 seconds before the bar graph display goes to 0% again, allowing enough time to position a patient, to illuminate the field light, and to take an exposure. 13-22-3 Recharge Phases During charge, available capacity will be increased in three phases. Phase I is the current limited phase, Phase II is the voltage limited phase, and Phase III is the timed voltage limited phase. The following paragraphs describe the rules governing the bar graph update. PHASE I (Current Limit) This phase occurs at the beginning of a charge cycle when the charger is putting out its maximum current and the voltage has not reached its maximum value. During this time, 50% of the segments unlit at the beginning of charge will be illuminated. Concurrently, the capacity remaining variable will be increased by 50%. SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE + 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE

PRESENT NUMBER OF SEGMENTS

SEGMENTS AT START OF CHARGE

Voltage at end of Current Ramp–Up

Present Voltage

Maximum Phase I Voltage (127V)

There are several exceptions to the above relationship: 1. This phase may be skipped when attempting to charge fully charged batteries or batteries which are resistant to charge. This occurs when the charging current is more than 20 DAC counts below maximum at the end of the charge ramp–up. 2. The maximum % change is limited to 10% per volt of difference between the beginning and ending Phase 1 voltages. As an example, if the voltage at the end of the current ramp–up is 123V, the maximum % change will be limited to 40% [(127V–124V)10%]. 3. If the clamp anticipation algorithm decreases the charge current by more than 20 DAC counts, phase 1 will end.

13-28



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 PHASE II (Voltage Limit) As the charge clamp voltage is approached or once it is exceeded, charge current is decreased to keep the battery charge voltage at the programmed limit. 50% of the segments unlit at the beginning of PHASE II will be lit during this phase. This phase is complete when the switch to trickle mode is made. Segments will be lit as a function of the present Charge DAC count as shown in the following graph. SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II + 50% OF UNLIT SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II


SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE II

DAC Count at Start of Phase II (typ. 130 counts)

Current DAC Value

Switch to Trickle Mode DAC Value (typ. 26 counts)

There is one exception to the above relationship. If charging batteries which are fully charged, Phase I will be by–passed and the starting Phase II charge DAC count will be very low. In this case, the maximum % change in capacity is limited to 0.7% per DAC count. As an example, if the DAC count at the start of Phase II is 76 and the Switch to trickle mode DAC count is 26, % change in capacity for Phase II will be 35%. Note that for nearly charged batteries and for batteries resistant to charge, this phase may be very short. PHASE III (Timed Charge) After the switch to the trickle mode has been made, the remaining charge is a function of time. When “CHARGE COMPLETE” is displayed, all bar segments will have been lit. The timed phase can be a top–off or an extended charge; the relationship is the same. Available capacity will be increased as shown in the following graph. ALL SEGMENTS


SEGMENTS AT START OF PHASE III

Timer Value at Start of Timed Phase

13-29

Current Timer Value

Timer = 0



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207 “Stuck–At–Full” Feature When the charge cycle reaches “CHARGE COMPLETE”, an additional amount of capacity will be added to the remaining capacity. This results in the automotive equivalent of having the fuel gauge “stuck–at–full” after filling up the fuel tank. The amount of “overcharge” is defaulted to 500mAHR. The amount of overcharge is controlled by the DATA BASE parameter Full Charge Excess Capacity. The segments on the bar graph display will be at full until this “overcharge” is used up during discharge.

ILLUSTRATION 13–11 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING RECHARGE (PICTORIAL) BAR GRAPH PRIOR TO CHARGING

CASE 1 Remaining Capacity = 5700mAHR

CASE 2

REMAINING CAPACITY = 0300MAHR

BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE I / BEGINNING PHASE II

CASE 1


CASE 2


BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE II / BEGINNING PHASE III

CASE 1


CASE 2


BAR GRAPH AT END OF PHASE III – “CHARGE COMPLETE”

CASE 1 REMAINING CAPACITY = 7000MAHR

CASE 2 REMAINING CAPACITY = 7000MAHR

The above CASE 1 and CASE 2 figures illustrate the three phase recharge concept. CASE 1 is an example of a nearly charged battery set (Phase I adds no bar segments) while CASE 2 is an example of a heavily discharged battery set. The equivalent capacity in mAHR is given immediately beneath the bar graph depiction. Default values are assumed.

13-30



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 13–12 FOR PROMS 46–329187G1/46–329188G1 OR 46–329187G2/46–329188G2: REMAINING CAPACITY AND PERCENT CHARGE DURING RECHARGE (GRAPHICAL)

BATTERY VOLTAGE

CHARGE COMPLETE “FULL CHARGE EXCESS CAPACITY” IS ADDED AT “CHARGE COMPLETE” % CHARGE ON BAR GRAPH DISPLAY


Charge Percent Displayed (in %) & Capacity Remaining (in 100's of Milliampere Hours)

Typical Non-Extended Charge Profile For Significantly Discharged Battery Set (Battery Voltage vs. Remaining Capacity and % Charge Displayed)

CAPACITY REMAINING IN 100’S OF MILLIAMPHOURS

PHASE I

PHASE II

PHASE III

TIME (Hours) Illustration 13–12 demonstrates how both the % charge displayed on the bar graph capacity gauge and the capacity remaining, increase during charge when starting with a significantly discharged battery set. Note that neither parameter is increased until after the initial ramp– up period.

13-31



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-22-4 Voltage Compensation To guard against unusual usage, a circuit defect, or shorted battery cells, all of which may cause a deviation from the current load model, voltage compensation is incorporated in the SMART GAUGE algorithm. To accomplish this, the energy removed during each cycle will be multiplied by a compensation factor as shown in the following table: VOLTAGE RANGE FOR WHICH ... ... Compensation Factor = 1

CONDITION

... Compensation Factor = 2

... Compensation Factor = 3

IDLE

> 112.0V

> 111.0V and < 112.0V

< 111.0V

DRIVE

> 110.5V

> 109.5V and < 110.5V

< 109.5V

FIELD LIGHT

> 111.0V

> 110.0V and < 111.0V

< 110.0V

DRIVE and FIELD LIGHT

> 109.5V

> 108.5V and < 109.5V

< 108.5V

The table above assumes the default condition of 11200 (2BC0 Hex) for the DATA BASE parameter “Nominal 0% capacity Millivolts” which represents 112.00V. The important item to note is that even with voltage compensation in effect, the bar graph (% capacity) response will still be linear with usage. The bar graph will not fall off sharply as had been the case with the previous capacity algorithm. 13-22-5 Diagnostic Aids As shown in the following table, certain DAC voltage outputs are provided to aid manufacturing, field service, and systems evaluation engineering in monitoring the parameters which drive the % capacity display with external measurement equipment. Quantity To Be Output

Quantity to Output Linear Relationship

DAC Name

AMX1A2A1 Test Point #

Present Voltage

110V = 0V output 140V = 10V output

KVP DEMAND

TP26

Remaining Capacity

0mAHR = 0V output 10000mAHR = 10V output

FIL CUR DEMAND

TP27

Bar Graph Percentage

0% = 0V output 100% = 10V output

LEAKAGE COMP DEMAND

TP28

These diagnostic outputs will be available except in the x–ray mode when the DAC’s are used for their intended purposes. The Charge Profile illustration in this section was generated by monitoring these test points during charge. 13-22-6 Battery Aging To guard against the adverse effects of aging batteries on high voltage generator performance, a battery aging algorithm is incorporated to reduce the capacity available over the range of the bar graph display as described in Section 13-22-1. If battery aging is effecting the system high voltage performance, the DATA BASE parameter “Battery Aging Capacity Offset” will begin to increase. It is limited to 70% of the value of the DATA BASE parameter “Total Capacity”. Relatively new battery sets may also activate this algorithm if a shorted cell(s) is present.

13-32



If a customer begins to complain about “Capacity Problems”, an inspection of the “Battery Aging Capacity Offset” DATA BASE parameter should be made using DATA BASE ACCESS to see if the algorithm has been activated. Note: This feature can be disabled by writing 0000 to the “Battery Aging Disable” DATA BASE parameter. Loading Defaults in the calibration mode does not zero the Battery Aging Capacity Offset" DATA BASE parameter, because batteries are not always replaced prior to Re-Calibrating a system. Therefore always inspect and zero this parameter any time battery sets or individual batteries are replaced.

IMPORTANT:

13-23

Heat Storage Tube Protection The new application firmware simulates the actual target temperature. It does not generate a heat wait after each exposure like the previous firmware. It only generates a heat wait for heat storage technique selection greater than the track on bulk limits.

13-24

Service Mode This mode of operation is intended to be used only by a service person. It can only be entered only with the use of the service switch. The service mode consists of three functions: calibration, extended diagnostics and data base access. These functions are described below.

13-25

Calibration To enter the calibration mode, the unit must be powered–up with the service switch in the service mode position. Once power–up testing is complete, the “CALIBRATE SYSTEM” function must be selected. At this point the following items can be calibrated.

13-25-1 Drive Handle Calibration The Handle Is The Only Portion Of The Drive system that requires calibration. The calibration is basically in two parts. First the “no force” transducer output is determined. Next the transducer output at full forward and full reverse handle displacement is determined for both the left and right channels. From these the magnet polarity and input gains can be determined. 13-25-2 Battery Charger Calibration During charger calibration, the AMX4 “learns” the relationship between the charge current command and the charge current feedback both for high charge and trickle charge. To do this the AMX 4 calibration firmware outputs two different charge commands and saves the charge current feedback for these points in the data base. From these values in the data base, the expected feedback at any charge command can be interpolated. The AMX 4 also “learns” the relationship between charge current command and actual charging current. The serviceperson is involved in this step since he enters the voltage across the charging current limit resistor. The value which is saved in the data base is: value = 2.5 ohms entered voltage 1000 The actual charging current is determined at two charge commands. This allows the actual charging current to be interpolated for any charge command.

13-33



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-25-3 Battery Voltmeter Calibration During this calibration step, the AMX 4 “learns” the relationship between actual battery voltage and the frequency of the VCO which monitors battery voltage. To do this, the AMX 4 counts battery voltage pulses for 5 seconds and then prompts the operator to enter the actual battery voltage. From this information a counts–per–volt ratio can be determined and stored in the data base.

13-25-4 Generator Calibration This calibration step is divided into four parts as shown below. It is assumed that the battery voltage calibration has been done properly. 13-25-5 mAs Calibration The Illustration 13–13 shows the mAs calibration circuitry. During mAs calibration approximately 100 mA is injected into the mA metering circuitry which is based on a Voltage Controlled Oscillator (VCO). The resulting frequency clocks the counter for a set period of time (3 seconds). As a result, the number of VCO pulses per mAs is given by: counts per mAs = counter contents (injected mA) (3 sec) 13-25-6 kVp Calibration This calibration step calibrates the AMX 4 to the particular bleeder/meter combination being used for measurement. During this step the AMX 4 “learns” the relationship between kVp demand and actual kVp. The service person monitors the kVp on an oscilloscope and enters the kVp value when the AMX 4 requests it. Calibration is done at 4 points – 52, 64, 85 and 120 kVp ILLUSTRATION 13–13 MAS CALIBRATION CIRCUIT

+V

100 mA

mA

l emiss

VCO

13-34

16 BIT COUNTER

P R O C E S S O R



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

13-25-7 Tap Relay Calibration This is the longest calibration step, but it is fully automated. All the service person is required to do is hold down the prep and expose switches. The purpose of Tap Calibration is to define the system characteristics of as many of the 28 valid tap combinations as possible. Starting at no taps selected, the AMX 4 determines which two kVp’s yield emission currents of 90 and 110 mA for each tap combination. The Illustration 13–14 shows the information that is gathered from this cal. For each tap combination two parameters are stored in the data base; the System Resistance which is the slope of the tap combination load line, and the Effective Turns Ratio which is the y–intercept (kVp at 0mA) divided by the battery voltage. 13-25-8 Filament Current (X–ray Tube Characteristics) Calibration Filament current demand is calibrated at four kVp station: 52, 64, 85 and 120 kVp. For each kVp station two tap combinations are used – the ones that will yield emission currents closest to 90mA and 110mA. Linear interpolation is used to determine the filament current demand values at 90 and 110 mA for each kVp station. These eight calibrated points are then used to interpolate the remaining filament current table entries in the data base as shown in Table 13–1. ILLUSTRATION 13–14 KVP VERSUS MA

EMISSION CURRENT (mA)

K5, K3, K2, K1 K5, K3, K2

kVp

K5, K3, K1

K2, K1

K2

NO TAPS OPEN

90

110

13-35

K1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

TABLE 13–1 FILAMENT CURRENT TABLE ENTRIES 90 mA

100 mA

kVp

extrapolated calibrated interpolated

extrapolated calibrated interpolated

50 52 54

interpolated calibrated interpolated


62 64 66



80 85 90

interpolated calibrated extrapolated

interpolated calibrated extrapolated

115 120 125

Obtaining the correct filament current demand at each of the eight calibration points is done as follows: 1. The filament current used for the first exposure at a new calibration point is based on data collected during tap calibration. 2. When an exposure is taken, the filament current feedback “error” (indicative of kVp error) is integrated. This integrated error and its polarity determines how much the filament current must be adjusted. 3. If the integrated error is greater than the maximum allowable error then take another exposure with the new filament current of step 2 above. 4. Repeat steps 2 & 3 until the error is within limits. 13-25-9 Field Light On Time Calibration This calibration step allows the field light “ON” time to be calibrated. Valid times are anywhere from 5 to 45 seconds.

13-26

Extended Diagnostics And Service Tools This portion of the service mode is intended to assist the service representative in trouble– shooting. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access to these tests.

13-27

Data Log Access This portion of the service mode allows access to the history of the unit. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access.

13-28

Data Base Access This portion of the service mode allows the service representative to view and change data base elements. It is password protected to prevent unauthorized access.

13-36



SECTION 14 TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS AND SERVICE AIDS 14-1

Isolating Battery Problems Battery problems manifest themselves in a multitude of manners. Some potential symptoms are: 1. Error 465 may appear during longer exposures (>50 ms). This error occurs when the battery voltage drop during an exposure is significantly greater than what it was during TAP CAL. New firmware versions don't display E-465 until after 100 occurrences. They are logged, however, so inspecting the data log on a regular basis is recommended. 2. Error 462 (excessive exposure time) may also indicate that the battery voltage drop during an exposure is significantly greater than what it was during TAP CAL. 3. The message BATTERY TOO LOW" RECHARGE REQUIRED" may apĆ pear even though there is significant capacity left according to the bar graph. 4. The circuit breaker may blow or the AMX4 may reset itself. This may occur if the voltage drops below 80V during exposure. Important:

Presence of one of the above symptoms does not justify replacing the batterĆ ies. The state-of-health" of the batteries must first be determined. See beĆ low.

14-1-1 Voltage Drop Under Load The only reliable method for determining whether a battery set is bad is to monitor the battery voltage under load at a lower state–of–charge. The procedure follows. 1. Bring the open circuit battery voltage on the set to between 112V and 113.00V unloaded. Drive the unit, use a lamp or some other type of load such as Service Tool 46-302882 (110 Volt/1200 Watt AMX-4 Load Fixture) 2. Monitor the battery voltage from the circuit breaker to the ground stud with a storage scope. Use 5 or 10V/div and 5 ms/div with negative edge trigger. 3. Take a 125 kVp 4 mAs exposure, getting the scope to trigger on the falling edge of the battery voltage. 4. Note the average drop from the PREP load voltage to the voltage during expoĆ sure. See Illustration 35, Voltage Drop Under Load.

14-1



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 14–1 VOLTAGE DROP UNDER LOAD PREP LOAD VOLTAGE AVERAGE DROP

If the average drop is greater than 17 volts the batteries as a set are bad.

14-2

CPU Dip Switch Positions

SW NORMAL # POSITiON

SW NAME

FUNCTION

PORT ADDR & BIT #

1

OFF

–

(NONE)

–

2

OFF

–

(NONE)

–

3

OFF

OPT SW 1

ENABLES POWER SUPPLY TESTS

1100H BIT 6

OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENABLES +24, +15 TESTS ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = DISABLES +24, +15 TESTS

4

OFF

BAUD RATE

SELECTS BAUD RATE

1100H BIT 5

OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = 375K BAUD RATE ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = 187.5K BAUD RATE

5

ON

OPT SW 4

(NOT USED)

1000H BIT 2

6

OFF–ENG ON–FREN

OPT SW 3

SELECTS LANGUAGE OF MESSAGE

1000H BIT 1

OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = ENGLISH ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = FRENCH

7

ON

OPT SW 2

CYCLES CPU

1400H BIT 2

OFF (PORT LOGIC 1) = CYCLE CPU AT POWER UP (SEE NOTE 1 BELOW) ON (PORT LOGIC 0) = NORMAL RUN MODE

8

OFF

–

(NONE)

–

COMMENTS

NOTE 1: Applicable ONLY to CPU board 46-264974, AND ONLY with PROMS 46-303815G1/46-303816G1 and later. This function enables the CPU board to be recycled in the diagnostic mode by setting switch #7 OFF, placing service mode switch down, and rebooting.

14-2



Generator Cal The following three subsections will help with common problems which may occur during generator calibration.

14-3-1 Tube Spits During “CALIBRATE TAPS” If you run into tube spits at high kVp’s during Tap Cal, try slowing the pace of the calibration once the kVp is greater than 125 kVp. That is, wait approximately 30 seconds between exposures and keep the unit in prep longer by allowing the message “READY FOR X– RAY” to be displayed for 5 seconds before pressing the expose switch. 14-3-2 X–ray Word Limit During “CAL FIL CUR TBL” If an “X–RAY WORD LIMIT” occurs during “CAL FIL CUR TBL” you can prevent the unit from forcing a re–calibration of the entire unit by doing the following: 1. With “X–RAY WORD LIMIT” still on the display press mAs until you get to the “CALIBRATE GENERATOR” level. (DO NOT TURN OFF POWER OR PUSH THE RESET SWITCH!) 2. Press mAs twice and redo the mAs calibration. This updates the appropriate checksums and prevents a forced recalibration of the active generator. 3. Redo “CAL FIL CUR TBL”. 14-3-3 Triggering – The Oscilloscope Prior to “CALIBRATE kVp” You can save time by making sure your oscilloscope triggers properly prior to entering “CALIBRATE kVp”. If the unit fails Power–Up Test 04, you can use the checksum by– pass feature to enter the application mode and take exposures. Use 50 kVp at 2 mAs to establish your trigger.

14-3



Synchronizing Internal Capacity Meter to Capacity Displayed (Firmware 46–329187G1 and 46–329188G1 or 46–329187G2 and 46–329188G2 ONLY) It is possible when servicing the AMX–4 to throw the internal capacity meter and the capacity displayed out–of–sync. This can occur if the batteries are discharged a considerable amount, say with the battery load fixture, followed by a volt meter calibration. If the AMX–4 is then put in the application mode, the %capacity displayed will be low while the internal capacity meter may still be quite high. Given this situation, it may take some time for the internal capacity meter to “catch–up” with the % capacity displayed. The reverse can happen if the batteries are charged outside of the application mode (or a new battery set is installed), followed by a volt meter calibration. In this case the unit may exhibit rapid bar graph fall off, while the % capacity displayed catches up with the internal capacity meter which hasn’t changed since the last time application mode was active. There are two remedies for these situations. 1. Charge the unit to “CHARGE COMPLETE”. This approach updates both the internal capacity meter and the % displayed and will eventually synchronize the two. 2. Using the LOOP TEST diagnostic tool, write FF into location 0CB4. This approach corrupts the internal capacity meter forcing a synchronization of internal capacity to % capacity the next time the system is powered up in the applications mode. Note:

The displays will be blank for about 5 seconds while this synchronization takes place.

14-4



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

SECTION 15 BLOCK DIAGRAMS 15-1

Illustration Listing Illustration 15-1.

X-Ray Enable Control

Illustration 15-2.

X-ray Enable Preparation And Expose Sequence

Illustration 15-3.

High Voltage Generation

Illustration 15-4.

Filament And mAs Control

Illustration 15-5.

Rotor Control

Illustration 15-6.

Left Drive Signal Flow

Illustration 15-7.

Right Drive Signal Flow

Illustration 15-8.

Left & Right Drive Functional Flow

Illustration 15-9.

Battery Power and Charging with Charger Board 46-288034 or 46-288786

Illustration 15-10. Battery Power Charge 46-288034 or 46-288786 Illustration 15-11. Battery Power Discharge 46-288034 or 46-288786

15-1

Cycle Cycle

with with

Charger

Board

Charger

Board




15-2

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–1 X–RAY ENABLE CONTROL AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER

GEN CNTRL 2 1000H GEN CNTRL 1 1200H

SEE ILL. 15-2 FOR X-RAY ENABLE, PREP SEQUENCE & EXPOSE SEQUENCE FLOW CHARTS

J3

TMR 2

PROG TIMER 1500H

EXP SW

23 25

PREP SW

PREP SW

EXP SW

EXP SW

DRIVERS

15

AEC EXP EN

J7 9

X-RAY PRES SW

AEC EXP EN

AEC EXP EN

8031 MICROCONTROLLER

EXP STOP*

CRITICAL STATUS 090H

ROTOR INTLK 60HZ INV OK FIL SHORTED

6

P1.1

J3

P1.4

5

P1.3

25

SAFETY CONT ENB*

10

J5

PREP SW

A N D

A N D

N O T

J4

25

O R

23

1 kHz EN TMR 0

DRIVERS

26

24

MAS SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

PWR OK

21

BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5

J1

PWR DOWN RST*

J8

LINE SENSE SEE ILL. 15-6 OR 15-7 VEHICLE DRIVE

J5

TUBE PARKED SW

X-RAY ON

10

6 13

22

J1

J8

MUX

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H

1 kHz PHASE 1/ 1 kHz PHASE 2

CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H

26

LEAK CMP DAC 1481H

J5 3

4

LEAKAGE COMP +/-

1

3

GEN CNTRL 1 1200H

KVP DMN DAC 1584H

11

12

FIL DMN DAC 1580H

7

8

TMR 0

DRIVERS

17

FIL DMN +/2 kHz PHASE 1/ 2 kHz PHASE 2

4 2

11

12

7

8

17

J3

13

J6

RECTIFIER

9

STOP SCR

COIL SELECTS

S U M

26

J6 DRIVERS

15 9

PREHEAT

SONALERT* X-RAY ON LAMP*

AUTO XFMR

HV XFMR & HV RECTIFIER

PRIMARY VOLTS+/ PRIMARY VOLTS-

+

L C S

X-RAY TUBE

-

60HZ INV OK

ROTOR INTLK

MA+ / MA-

SUM

FILAMENT DRIVE

FILAMENT XFMR

2KHZ INVERTER VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT

SHORT DETECT

22

21

25

X-RAY ON

MAS

FIL SHORTED

L C

AMX1 A1 A1 DISPLAY CONTROLLER LS85 SONALERT

J2 17

S CATHODE

J2

J1

ANODE

+24V

X-RAY PRES SW

PRIMARY VOLTS+/ PRIMARY VOLTS-

26

9

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR

STOP CAP

16

19

15

ROTOR INTLK

6

DETECT KV 75% OF DEMAND

J2

60HZ INV OK

COM CAP + -

5-7 MS DELAY

PREHEAT

1 SCR

-BATT

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL

J7

3

2 SCR

START SCR

J2

2 kHz EN

J5

15-3

19

KVP DMN +/-

2

J4

DETECT -70VDC

5

SAFETY CONTACTOR

1/ 2 (HV DRIVE) J5

12

11

7

1KHZ INVERTER

24

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE

START SCR HI/LO

STOP SCR HI/LO

OPTO ISO'S

1

PROG TIMER 1500H

J4

START PULSE GEN

STOP PULSE GEN

23

1 kHz INVERTER READY

12

PULSE COUNTER T1

J1

TAP SELECTS

6

SEE ILL. 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

25

EXP STOP CMND

KV FDBK +/-

INT1

J1

+BATT

EXP START

P1.5

X-RAY ON

AMX1 A4 A1 1 kHz INVERTER

EXP START CMND

ROTOR DRIVE

12

SAFETY CONTACTOR

SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

GEN CNTRL 2 1000H

P1.7

ROTOR DRIVE

CURRENT DETECT

K37

10

8

N O T

PROG TIMER 1500H

P1.6 X-RAY ON

60HZ INVERTER

13

J4

GEN CNTRL 1 1200H

P1.2

3

15

+24V

P1.0 X-RAY PRES SW

60HZ PHASE 1/ 60HZ PHASE 2

13

BU TMR OKAY

EXP BACKUP TIMER 1300H

HAND SWITCH

11

60 Hz EN

12

J8

SEE ILL. 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

9

60HZ INV RELAY*

11

GEN CNTRL 2 1000H PREP SW

9

AMX1 A3 A2 ROTOR CONTROL

J1

ROTOR SELECT*

60HZ INV OK X-RAY ON LAMP*

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY

ROTOR INTLK J1 17

DS30 XRAY ON



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-4

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–2 X–RAY ENABLE PREPARATION AND EXPOSE SEQUENCE

1 ENABLE X-RAY MODE

2 PREP SEQUENCE PREP SEQUENCE

PREP SW PRESSED & TUBE NOT PARKED (FROM ENABLE X-RAY MODE)

START

CHECK INTERLOCKS:

ARE X-RAYS INHIBITED? X-RAYS INHIBITED IF: BAT V < 112 VDC BACKUP TIMER EXPIRED ON LAST EXPOSURE UNIT NOT CALIBRATED LINE SENSE DETECTED ON POWER-UP PREP OR EXPOSE SWITCH DETECTED ON POWER-UP

X-RAYS INHIBITED

X-RAYS NOT INHIBITED IS HEAT WAIT REQUIRED?

YES

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY HEAT WAIT

NO

BOOST FILAMENT BY ASSERTING THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS:

YES IS TUBE PARKED?

START ROTOR BY ASSERTING THE FOLLOWING SIGNALS: ROTOR SELECT* 60HZ INV RELAY* 60 Hz EN

NO IS PREP SW PRESSED?

VERIFY DATA BASE CHECKSUM MAKE SURE THE FOLLOWING CRITICAL STATUS SIGNALS ARE OK: - X-RAY PRES SW - 60HZ INV OK - ROTOR INTLK - 1 kHz INVERTER READY - FIL SHORTED - X-RAY ON VERIFY THAT NO HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS ARE SELECTED VERIFY BACKUP TIMER STATUS

YES

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY

PREHEAT 2 kHz EN

TUBE PARKED OUTPUT KVP DMN VALUE BASED ON OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT

NO

OUTPUT LEAKAGE COMP VALUE AS CALCULATED FROM DATA BASE

GO TO PREP SEQ

3 EXPOSE SEQUENCE EXP SEQUENCE

EXPOSE SW PRESSED

ASSERT EXP START CMND

EXPOSURE BEGINS. FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD DETECTS HV AND ASSERTS X-RAY ON. X-RAY ON KICKS OFF THE FOLLOWING EVENTS: STARTS BACKUP TIMER TRIGGERS 8031 uC INT1, STARTING MAS PULSE COUNTER SOUNDS SONALERT LIGHTS X-RAY ON LAMP

8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL DATA (SEE 2-2-1, FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL)

8031 uC CONTINUOUSLY CHECKS INTERLOCKS

WHEN MAS PULSE COUNT = OPERATOR'S mAs INPUT, 8031 uC ASSERTS EXP STOP CMND. EXPOSURE STOPS.

TURN OFF 1KHZ & 2KHZ INVERTERS

UPDATE FIL DMN DATA BASE USING AUTO CAL INFO

OUTPUT FIL DMN VALUE BASED ON: OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT SAMPLED BAT V LEVEL AUTO CAL DATA BASE

PREPARE FOR HIGH VOLTAGE: ASSERT SAFETY CONT ENB SELECT HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS ASSERT 1 kHz EN LOAD EXP BACKUP TIMER INITIALIZE MAS PULSE COUNTER

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY READY FOR X-RAY

GO TO EXP SEQ

15-5

TURN OFF ROTOR & HV AUTO XFMR RELAY TAPS

WAIT FOR RELEASE OF PREP SWITCH

EXIT

ssssss




15-6

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION AMX1 A4 HV MODULE

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING -BATT

-BATT START SCR HI/LO

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

START SCR

COM CAP CHARGE

K5

COM CAP C2

K4

+

STOP SCR HI/LO

SAFETY CONTACTOR

STOP SCR

COM CAP RECTIFIER

COM CAP CHARGE RTN

STOP SCR HI/LO

SAFETY CONTACTOR

+BATT

P2

(STOP CHARGE = -70V)

STOP CAP

SEE ILL. 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR

K6

START SCR HI/LO

STOP CAP

SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

SCR

PRIMARY VOLTS-

AUTO XFMR T1

+BATT SAFETY CONTACTOR K7

HV XFMR T1

HV RECTIFIER

+

L

ANODE

C S

-

X-RAY TUBE

K3

K2

AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY kVp

+24V

S43

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER J1 34

S44 32

KVP UP KVP DOWN

J6 11

OPER I/O STATUS 1400H

13

PROG TIMER 1500H

TMR 0

16

J4 24

DRIVERS

GEN CNTRL 2 1000H

6

14

7 9 GEN & AEC STATUS 1600H

6

13 15 17

P1.0

19

8

TAP 1* TAP 6 FDBK TAP 5 FDBK TAP 4 FDBK TAP 3 FDBK TAP 2 FDBK TAP 1 FDBK

1

NVRAM DATA BASE

A/D CNTRL 1280H

A/D CONVERT 1200H D0-D7 DATA BUS

8031 uC READS OPERATOR'S kVp INPUT AND SETS AUTO XFMR TAPS & KVP DEMAND DAC ACCORDINGLY

15-7

KVP DMN DAC 1584H

13

14

11

12

6

6

18

8

20

9

K1

2

9

OPTO ISO'S

6

13

K6 COIL K5 COIL

FILAMENT XFMR T2

K4 COIL K3 COIL K1 COIL

17

RECTIFIER

2

2

13

14

J6

1 3

PRIMARY VOLTSPRIMARY VOLTS+


J7

1

20:1 KV FDBK XFMR T25

AMP J2 AMP

DETECT KV 75% OF DEMAND

J2

DETECT KV>15KV ABOVE DEMAND

J6

22

X-RAY ON


TRIP BRKR*

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

KVP DMN +/11

12

AMP

2

L C S CATHODE

K2 COIL

15

J3

P1

SEE ILL. 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

6

19

PRIMARY VOLTS+

1

7

KVP DMN FBK +/-

J5

5

7

KV FDBK +/-

ANALOG MUX

6

DRIVERS

16

KV FDBK +/-

HAND SWITCH

OPTO ISO'S

6

14

TAP 2*

P1.1

4

10

TAP 3*

16


POAD0POAD7

5

J5

TAP 4*

20


1

SCR

26

TAP 5*

18

EXP SW

J4 1 kHz XFMR T120

TAP 6*

10

PREP SW

J1

1 kHz EN 8


24

1 kHz PHASE 1

26 GEN CNTRL 1 1200H


1 kHz PHASE 2



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-8



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–4 FILAMENT AND MAS CONTROL AMX1 A1 A2 DISPLAY mAs

+24V

S45

J1 31

S46 33 kVp

S43 34 S44 32

MAS UP MAS DOWN KVP UP KVP DOWN

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER

J6 5

D0-D7 DATA BUS

7

FIL DMN DAC 1580H

OPER I/O STATUS 1400H

11

KVP DMN DAC 1584H

AMX1 A4 A2 FIL / KVP CONTROL FIL DMN +/-

J5 7

8

7

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE

J2 8

AMP S U M

KVP DMN +/11

12

11

12

AMP

MODULATOR


PREHEAT

26

2 kHz EN

15 DRIVERS

PWM E

3

2 kHz PHASE 1

8

2 kHz PHASE 2

19

26

10

9

FILAMENT XFMR T2

17

BUF

FET

19

BUF

FET SHORT DETECT

AMP

10

J5

1

3

PWM RTN 1

PWM RTN 1

PWM RTN 2

PWM RTN 2

FIL SHORTED

J2 25


EXP SW

KV FDBK +/-

J7 AMP


1

2

1

J3 2

RECTIFIER

LEAKAGE COMP FDBK +/-

P1.0

5

A/D CNTRL 1280H

P1.1

HAND SWITCH SEE ILL. 15-1 X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL

ANALOG MUX

LEAK CMP DAC 1481H

6

5

6

3

4

3

4


PULSE COUNTER T1

MUX POAD0POAD7

NVRAM DATA BASE

DURING PREP SEQUENCE, 8031 uC SETS UP DAC'S: - SETS UP FIL DEMAND DAC BASED ON: * OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION * BATTERY VOLTAGE * CALCULATED EMISSION CURRENT AS DETERMINED BY CAL DATA BASE - SETS KVP DEMAND DAC TO A UNIQUE VALUE FOR EACH OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION (THIS FINE-TUNES kVp AUTO XFMR TAP SELECTIONĊSEE ILL. 15-3, HIGH VOLTAGE GEN) - SETS UP LEAKAGE COMP DAC TO COMPENSATE FOR HV TANK LEAKAGEĊOTHERWISE MA VALUE WOULD APPEAR TO BE HIGHER THAN IT ACTUALLY IS. DAC VALUE BASED ON: * OPERATOR'S kVp SELECTION * CAL DATA BASE DURING EXPOSE SEQUENCE, 8031 uC COLLECTS AUTO CAL DATA: - READS FIL FDBK - READS LEAKAGE COMP FDBK - READS KVP DMN FDBK (SEE ILL . 15-3, HV GEN) TO END EXPOSURE, 8031 uC COUNTS MAS PULSES. WHEN PULSE COUNT = OPERATOR-SELECTED mAs, EXPOSURE TERMINATES. (SEE ILL. 15-1, X-RAY ENABLE CONTROL.) AFTER EXPOSURE, 8031 uC UPDA TES AUTO CAL DATA BASE

15-9

AMP

5-7 mS DELAY

LEAKAGE COMP +/-

21

MAS

21

20:1 KV FDBK XFMR T25

AMX1 A4 HV MODULE

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT

DURING EXPOSURE, FIL/KVP CONTROL BOARD DRIVES FIL CURRENT UNTIL KV FDBK = KV DMN

AUTO XFMR T1

S U M

J3 1

RECTIFIER

DETECT >150MA

L CATHODE

XS1

XS2

J6

3 1


X-RAY ON

AMP

100MA = 16kHz NOMINAL

S C


8031 MICROCONTROLLER A/D CONVERT 1200H

X-RAY TUBE

XC

CURRENT DETECT

FIL FDBK +/-

PREP SW

PWM L

L3

15

17

9

CHOKE

8 AMP CURRENT LIMIT

16 kHz CLK

TMR 0

PROG TIMER 1500H

PREHEAT

J8

PWM POWER AMP

AMX1 A6 A1 HV XFMR

2

J6 2

MA+ MA-

TRIP BRKR*

MA FDBK XFMR T2

PRIMARY VOLTS+ PRIMARY VOLTS-

J2


1 3

MA+ MA-

P1 P2

MA+ MA-

HV XFMR T1

HV RECTIFIER +

L C S

SAMPLE

ANODE



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-10

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–5 ROTOR CONTROL AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE COLL LAMP TRANS A3T2

TO COLL FIELD LAMP A3F7


KEY SWITCH

KEY SWITCH

FET

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES -

+BATT SWITCHED

K215

+

-BATT

J8

K121

F93

2

J2

1

J6

AMX1 A3 A2 ROTOR CONTROL

AMX1 A3 A1 BATTERY CHARGER

T1 PHASE 2 6

ROTOR DRIVE XFMR T1

2

K39 100 VAC

T1 PRI COM 3

J6

T1 SEC COM

J7

J3 3

HAND SWITCH PREP SW

J8 23

8031 MICROCONTROLLER P1.0 CRITICAL STATUS 090H


GEN CNTRL 1 1200H

PROG TIMER 1500H

J3 11

60 Hz EN

TMR 2

2

DRIVERS

15


WHEN OPERATOR PRESSES PREP SWITCH, 8031 uC ENABLES 60HZ INVERTER & ROTOR SELECT RELAYSĊ X-RAY TUBE ROTOR MOTION BEGINS.

15-11

9

60HZ INV RELAY* 60HZ PHASE 1

60HZ PHASE 2

ROTOR SELECT*

PHASE SHIFT L (ROTOR (GRN)

J4 2

3

ROTOR COMM

1)

X-RAY TUBE

(WHT)

T1 PHASE 1 FET

1

1

4

T5

D0-D7 DATA BUS

PHASE SHIFT CAP C1

2

T6

B-


PHASE SHIFT E

CURRENT DETECT

J1 3

ROTOR

2

ROTOR INTLK

J1 11

15

13

9

27 VAC 1 OPTO ISO'S

DRIVERS

27 VAC RTN 80 VAC

2

80 VAC RTN

6 7

RECTIFIER

OPTO ISO

5 J4

8

2

9

1

(BLK)

60HZ INV OK COM CAP CHARGE COM CAP CHARGE RTN





REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-12



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–6 LEFT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A2 TOP DECK

AMX1 A5 A2 DRIVE POWER AMP J1

3 5

7


J8 +10V REF SUPPLY

HALL LFT REF RTN 8

LFT MAN TDS OUT 4 3

HALL EFFECT SENSOR S3

MAGNET

HALL LFT REF

AMX1 A5 A1 DRIVE CONTROL

REF OUT ANALOG MUX

A/D CONVERT 1200H

LFT SPD DMN DAC 1401H

J2

7

8

A/D CNTRL 1280H

7

8

J2

4 AMP

VOLTAGE -TOPULSE WIDTH CONVERT

VOLTAGE CLAMP

S U M

3

4

3

8 4

AMP

DIRECTTION DETECT

LEFT

7

3

S5

LEFT DRIVE ENA SW

S4

RIGHT DRIVE ENA SW J1

TS2

S1 TUBE PARKED SW

+24V

NORMALLY OPEN S1: CLOSED = PARKED N.O. = NOT PARKED

SEE ILL. 15-9 BATTERY POWER / CHARGING DRIVE ENA SW 1

1

27 TUBE PARKED SW LINE SENSE

J8

13 6

J1

17 CHGR & DRV CONTROL 1100H



13 15 16 14

DRIVE ENA SW FULL SPD ENA DRIVE RESET MOTOR ENA LEFT STALL

PWR OK

10

S4 & S5: BOTH SWITCHES MUST CLOSE FOR FORWARD, REVERSE OR PIVOT MOTION. (PROVIDES A REDUNDANT DEADMAN'S SWITCH.")

NOT

8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT: - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO LFT SPD DMN DAC - IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS FULL SPD ENA. IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%. - IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE), 8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE - IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS REVERSE MOTION ONLY - IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR DRIVE. RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE RESETS STALL DETECT.

2

A N D

9

J2 17

17

13 INV

STALL RESET*

DRIVERS

12

16

14 STALL DETECT

14

10

4

LEFT VM+

POWER FET

1

POWER FET

3

RED

LEFT BOT CW*

8

LEFT VM-

BLK LEFT MOTOR AMX2 A1 MTR1

LEFT TOP CCW*

LEFT BOT CCW* LEFT IM+ LEFT IM-

OPTO ISO

7

POWER FET

POWER FET

3 5 2

J11

DS285 BUMPER*

5

ANALOG MUX

3

15

OPTO ISO

CCW

D0-D7 DATA BUS

SEE ILL. 15-7 VEHICLE DRIVE (RIGHT)

J9

CW

DRIVERS


LEFT TOP CW*

DRIVERS

LEFT DRV FDBK +/-

HANDLE ASSM

F1

K1

2

J9

LEFT DRV CMND +/-

LEFT V+

J1

AMX1 A5 MOTOR DRIVE MODULE

DRIVE ENA SW

LEFT MOTOR ENA BRAKE RELEASE

+BATT SWITCHED J11

O R

+5V DRV

1 2

BUMPER #1 BUMPER #2


-BATT

9 J4 1

17

INV

12

1

LEFT PWR*

INV

14

2

3

DRIVE ENA

K145

J10 J7

BJ10

IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING, BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & BUMPER* = TRUE (0V)

J5 1

1

+BATT

+BATT

BRAKE RELEASE 1

TUBE PARKED SW HANDLE

AMX2 A2 FRONT BASE BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON

S1

LEFT BUMPER

S2

RIGHT BUMPER

BUMPER

+BATT S6

BRAKE RELEASE

BRAKE RELEASE

15-13

BRAKE RELEASE

LEFT BRAKE SOLENOID AMX2 A1 BRK1

DRIVE WHEEL



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-14



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–7 RIGHT DRIVE SIGNAL FLOW AMX1 A2 TOP DECK

J2

3 5

5


J8 +10V REF SUPPLY

HALL RGT REF RTN 6

RGT MAN TDS OUT 4 1

HALL EFFECT SENSOR S2

MAGNET

HALL RGT REF

AMX1 A5 A2 DRIVE POWER AMP AMX1 A5 A1 DRIVE CONTROL

REF OUT ANALOG MUX

RT SPD DMN DAC 1400H

A/D CONVERT 1200H

J2

5

A/D CNTRL 1280H

6

5

J2

23 AMP

VOLTAGE -TOPULSE WIDTH CONVERT

VOLTAGE CLAMP

S U M

1

2

1

19 2

AMP

DIRECTTION DETECT

RIGHT

22

24

S5

LEFT DRIVE ENA SW

S4

RIGHT DRIVE ENA SW J1

TS2

S1 +24V

TUBE PARKED SW

NORMALLY OPEN

DRIVE ENA SW 1

1

27 TUBE PARKED SW LINE SENSE

J8

13 6

J1

SEE ILL. 15-9

PWR OK

BATTERY POWER / CHARGING

3

17 CHGR & DRV CONTROL 1100H



13 15 16 12

S1: CLOSED = PARKED N.O. = NOT PARKED

DRIVE ENA SW FULL SPD ENA DRIVE RESET MOTOR ENA RIGHT STALL

10 8031 uC READS CHGR & DRV STATUS PORT: - IF DRIVE ENA SW CLOSED (ACTUATED BY HANDLE), 8031 READS HALL EFFECT SENSOR, OUTPUTS APPROPRIATE VALUE TO RT SPD DMN DAC - IF TUBE PARKED SW CLOSED, 8031 ASSERTS FULL SPD ENA. IF TUBE PARKED SW OPEN, 8031 NEGATES FULL SPD ENA, REDUCING DRIVE SPEED B Y 50%. - IF THE AC LINE IS SENSED (CHARGE CYCLE), 8031 PROHIBITS VEHICLE DRIVE - IF A BUMPER SWITCH OPENS, 8031 ALLOWS REVERSE MOTION ONLY - IF STALL IS DETECTED, 8031 STOPS MOTOR DRIVE. RELEASING AND RE-APPLYING HANDLE RESETS STALL DETECT.

BUMPER*

26

A N D

9

J2 17

17

13 INV

STALL RESET*

DRIVERS

11

16

14 STALL DETECT

12

10

OPTO ISO

23

RIGHT VM+

POWER FET

RED

3

RIGHT BOT CW*

POWER FET

19

1

RIGHT VM-

BLK RIGHT MOTOR AMX2 A1 MTR2

RIGHT TOP CCW*

RIGHT BOT CCW* RIGHT IM+ RIGHT IM-

OPTO ISO

22

POWER FET

POWER FET

24 20 26

J11

DS289

S4 & S5: BOTH SWITCHES MUST CLOSE FOR FORWARD, REVERSE OR PIVOT MOTION. (PROVIDES A REDUNDANT DEADMAN'S SWITCH.")

20

ANALOG MUX

NOT

15

J9

CCW

D0-D7 DATA BUS

SEE ILL. 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE (LEFT)

RIGHT TOP CW*

CW

DRIVERS


F2

K2

DRIVERS

RIGHT DRV FDBK +/-

HANDLE ASSM

RIGHT V+ 2

J9

RIGHT DRV CMND +/6

J2

AMX1 A5 MOTOR DRIVE MODULE

DRIVE ENA SW

RIGHT MOTOR ENA BRAKE RELEASE

+BATT SWITCHED J11

O R

+5V DRV

1 2

BUMPER #1 BUMPER #2


-BATT

9 J4 1

17

INV

11

1

K145

J10 J7

BJ10

IF BUMPER HITS SOMETHING, BUMPER SWITCH OPENS & BUMPER* = TRUE (0V)

RIGHT PWR*

INV

14

2

2

DRIVE ENA

J6 1

1

+BATT

+BATT

BRAKE RELEASE 2

TUBE PARKED SW HANDLE

AMX2 A2 FRONT BASE BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON

S1

LEFT BUMPER

S2

RIGHT BUMPER

BUMPER

+BATT S6

BRAKE RELEASE

BRAKE RELEASE

15-15

BRAKE RELEASE

RIGHT BRAKE SOLENOID AMX2 A1 BRK2

DRIVE WHEEL



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-16

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–8 LEFT & RIGHT DRIVE FUNCTIONAL FLOW DRIVE CONTROLLER

+5V-DRV DRIVE POWER AMP

64A

+

F9

F1(2)

BATTERY

MUST HAVE +5V–DRV TO ENABLE HIGH SIDE FETS

+ BATT SWITCHE D

8A

K1(2)

CHARGE PANEL

-8V

HIGH A

+ -

-5V

K1(2)

MUX

DIF F AM P 1

+ BATT SWITCHE D BRAKE

K145

K145

WHT BLK

3 4

+

-

ERROR

X 6.25

STALL PWR OK (FROM BATT CHARGE BOARD)

VOLTAGE TO PULSE WIDTH CONVERTER

TP11

STALL RESET TO HIGH SIDE FET A TO LOW SIDE FET A

FALL DELAY

TO HIGH SIDE FET B

FALL DELAY

TO LOW SIDE FET B

SHOULD BE 8.7 VOLTS WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS HIGH AND 4.2 VOLTS WHEN FULL SPD ENA IS LO. HAS CAPACITOR DELAY. CLAMPS VOTAGE INTO PULSE WIDTH CONVERTER

DIR

FALLING EDGE DELAY PREVENTS HIGH AND LOW SIDE FETS FROM BEING ON AT THE SAME TIME AND DESTROYING THEMSELVES

FULL SPD ENA +5V-DRV

THESE OUTPUTS ARE INVERTED BY THE FET DRIVERS, THUS A LOW WILL TURN ON THE FET.

DRIVE COMMAND -10 TO 10V

DRV FBK

TP19 (18) DATA BASE

MUX U342

X1

D/A

SAMPL HOLD

A/D

U151-3

SOFTWARE CONTROL

U151-4(7) PORTS

U264-6 U264-19

10 V

24mS 1mS

WHEN THE ENABLE BAR IS ENGAGED, THIS SIGNAL FORCES THE HALL EFFECT SIGNAL INTO THE MUX TO BE 0 CPUVOLTS FOR A SHORT TIME. THE SOFTWARE CHECKS TO SEE THAT THIS OCCURS (SAFETY FEATURE)

15-17

BUMPER SWITCHES: CLOSE WHEN OBJECT IS HIT

MOTOR ENA

TP29

HANDLE CHECK

SELECTABLE AMP

FALL DELAY LOGIC

DRIVE ENA SW

5

SMALL BLACK CONNECTOR OUT OF HANDLE ENDS

DIR

+/-1

FALL DELAY

CLOCK 10.9 KHZ

-

TP5 (10)

+

SHORTS TO GND WHEN DRIVE IS NOT ENABLED

DRV FBK SHOULD BE 5 VOLTS WHEN THE UNIT IS NOT MOVING. IT SHOULD MOVE TP15 BELOW 5 VOLTS PIN 25 (26) IN ONE DIRECTION AND ABOVE 5 VOLTS TP22 +10V REF IN THE OTHER. (21)

+

X 10

FET SWITCH

TP15 (20)

COMPARATOR

SELECTABLE AMP

TP7 (8)

OUTPUT OF CONTROLLER BOARD PULSE WILL CLEAR LATCH

+/-1

LEVEL SHIFTER

.2 OHMS

STALL

STALL

CLR

TP4 (9)

DIF F AMP 5 - (.5 X TP4)

K1(2) DRIVE CONTACTOR

RED

–8 VOLTS/ AMP FEEDBACK

IF STALL IS HIGH, LED WILL BE ON AND ERROR WILL OCCUR

COMPARATOR

LOW B

.2 OHMS

HALL EFFECT SENSOR

LATCH DELAYED STALL

-

-3.98

HALL OUTPUT WILL RANGE FROM ABOUT 3 TO 7 VOLTS. THIS IS TRANSLATED INTO A –10 TO +10 VOLT COMMAND BY THE SOFTWARE

DS285 (289)

+

TP1 (2)

DYMANIC BRAKE RESISTOR

REV B

GOES HIGH (STALL) IF TP3 GETS GREATER THAN TP17 +10 VOLTS (18)

NORMALLY 0 VOLTS. WILL START TO RISE IF TP1 GETS MORE NEGATIVE THAN –5 VOLTS (6.25A) TP3 (6) +10V

INTEGRATOR

R1(2)

AMX IV DRIVE CIRCUITRY FAST STALL

COMPARATOR

HIGH B

LOW A

NOTE: RIGHT AND LEFT DRIVE CIRCUITS ARE THE SAME. NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS IS FOR RIGHT DRIVE CIRCUIT

TP16 GOES HIGH (STALL) (19)IF TP1 GETS MORE NEGATIVE THAN –8 VOLTS (10A)

SQUARE WAVE ONLY WHEN ENABLE BAR IS ENGAGED OTHERWISE CONSTANT 10V ERROR CODES

U151-13 U151-18 +24V +24V

BUMPER STALL STALL RESET FULL SPD ENA DRIVE ENA SW TUBE PARKED SW

ENABLE BAR SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN DRIVE IS ENABLED

PARK SWITCH: CLOSED WHEN TUBE IS PARKED



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-18

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–9 BATTERY POWER AND CHARGING, WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786 AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

F1

FAN

T3


CHOKE

117 VAC

K150

J5 1

L2

WH

NEUTRAL

F2

5

GRN

PHASE DETECT

AMX1 A2 A1 CONTROLLER CHGR & DRV STATUS 1000H

J1

6

K216

AMP

SEE ILLS. 15-10 & 15-11 FOR DETAILED CHARGE & DISCHARGE CYCLE CIRCUIT OPERATION

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H

CHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE

C O M P A R E

11

KEY SWITCH ON

K62

8 AMP 9 J2

K215

K196

9

CHARGE SCALE SELECT

SEE ILL 15-4 FILAMENT / mAs CONTROL

TRIP BRKR*

+ B A T T

+ B A T T

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

+

BRAKE RELEASE BUTTON

I-CHARGE FBK+ F5

-BATT

CB1 BATT

B A T T

DRIVE MOTORS SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION B A T T

-BATT

B A T T

-BATT

B-

BAT SWT (+BATT SWITCHED)

KEY SWITCH

J4 1

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK J1

J1

1

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED

B A T T

+BATT 2

AMX1 A2 A2 LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY (LVLE) POWER SUPPLY


KEY SWITCH

+24V +15V -15V +5V

TO ALL CKT BDS

+24V

POWER-UP DELAY

12

4 J10

8

PWR STABLE O R

J6

O P E N *

+ B A T T

7

8


+ B A T T

-

+24V

TRIP BRKR


B R E A K E R

10

12

SEE ILL 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

4

11

7

CHARGER & DRIVE CONTROL 1100H

+ B A T T

I-CHARGE FBK-


8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF BAT V IS LESS THAN 110V.

+BATT

SEE ILL 15-5 ROTOR CONTROL

CHARGER RELAY*

DISCHARGE CYCLE

64A

KLINE2

K150* K149**

10

8A

F10

SEE ILL. 15-5 OR 15-6 VEHICLE DRIVE

TIMES 0.8 OR TIMES 8 AMP

ANALOG MUX

C B 1 B A T T

S U M

7.8 kHz +/- 25% @ 120V +BATT 4.6 kHz +/- 35% @ 0.5V I-CHRG, AMP @X8

BAT V & CHARGING CUR 5 5

MUX

CB1

BAT CHARGE-

RAMP GEN

K-LINE2 TO K196

+24V

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT PULSE COUNTER T1

CB1

1

4

6

I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

D0-D7 DATA BUS

F4

+BATT

F6

I-CHARGE CMND 3 3

CHARGE CUR DAC 1480H


LINE SENSE

J1

BAT CHARGE+

145 VDC REGULATOR

-

FRAME GROUND

117 VAC 60 Hz

F9

F55 RECTIFIER

3 BLK

J11

SCR

+

110 VAC

CORD REEL

+BATT

BREAKER TRIP*

2

2 A N D

J4 5

PWR OK PWR OK

PWR OK

PWR OK

AMX1 A3 F3

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR S2

BREAKER OPEN*

AMX1 A2 K1

J4

8

O R

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46–288786

DETECT >150MA

15-19

UPPER COLUMN BRAKE -BATT

ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

S3

S2 & S3 ARE BRAKE RELEASE SWITCHES LOCATED ON COLL HANDLES.



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-20

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–10 BATTERY POWER CHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786 AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

F1

FAN

T3


CHOKE

117 VAC

K150

J5 1

L2

WH

NEUTRAL

F2

5

GRN

PHASE DETECT


J1

6

K216

AMP


MUX

ON-BOARD CNTRL 1280H OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H

CHARGE CYCLE 8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE

11

KEY SWITCH ON


K62

8

AMP

9

J2

ANALOG MUX

K215

K196

+24V

11


DETECT >150MA


DRIVE MOTORS

SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

-

I-CHARGE FBK+

F5

-BATT

CB1 BATT

B A T T

B A T T

-BATT

B A T T

-BATT

B-


KEY SWITCH

1

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK

J1

J1

1

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED

B A T T

+BATT 2



+24V +15V -15V +5V

TO ALL CKT BDS

+24V

POWER-UP DELAY

12

4 J10

8

PWR STABLE O R

TRIP BRKR*

+ B A T T

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

+

KEY SWITCH

CHARGE SCALE SELECT

8

J6

+ B A T T


J4

TRIP BRKR


O P E N *

+ B A T T

7

12


+BATT

+ B A T T

B R E A K E R

10

7


64A

I-CHARGE FBK-




4

9

CHARGER RELAY*

DISCHARGE CYCLE

8A

F10

KLINE2

K150* K149**

10

CB1


S U M


B A T T

+ B A T T

C O M P A R E

6

I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

C B 1

RAMP GEN

K-LINE2 TO K196

+24V

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT PULSE COUNTER T1

CB1

BAT CHARGE-

4

3

D0-D7 DATA BUS

F4

1

F6

I-CHARGE CMND 3



LINE SENSE

J1

BAT CHARGE+

145 VDC REGULATOR

-

FRAME GROUND

117 VAC 60 Hz

+BATT

F55 RECTIFIER

3 BLK

F9

ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍ ÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍÍ Í Í Í J11

SCR

+

110 VAC

CORD REEL

+BATT

BREAKER TRIP*

2

8

O R

NOTE:

15-21

2 A N D

J4 5

PWR OK PWR OK

PWR OK

PWR OK

AMX1 A3 F3

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR S2

BREAKER OPEN*

AMX1 A2 K1

J4

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD CHARGE CYCLE 46–288786 CROSS–HATCHED PATH ( ) REPRESENTS CIRCUITRY TO SUPPLY THE LOW VOLTAGE LIMITED ENERGY POWER SUPPLY FROM THE LINE INSTEAD OF FROM THE BATTERIES DURING THE CHARGING CYCLE.

ÍÍÍ


ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

S3




REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-22

ssssss



REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207

ILLUSTRATION 15–11 BATTERY POWER DISCHARGE CYCLE WITH CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 OR 46–288786 AMX1 A3 ROTOR CONTROL & BATTERY CHARGER MODULE

LAMP (NEWER UNITS)

F1

FAN

T3


CHOKE

117 VAC

K150

J5 1

L2

WH

NEUTRAL

F2

5

GRN

PHASE DETECT


J1

6

K216

AMP

B A T T C O M P A R E

OPERATOR I/O STATUS 1400H

11

KEY SWITCH ON

K62

8


AMP 9 J2

ANALOG MUX

K215

K196

+ B A T T

AMX2 A3 BATTERIES

+


DRIVE MOTORS SAFETY CONTACTOR SEE ILL. 15-3 HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATION

I-CHARGE FBK+ F5

-BATT

CB1 BATT

B A T T

B A T T

-BATT

B A T T

-BATT

B-


KEY SWITCH

J4 1

AMX1 A2 TOP DECK J1

J1

1

+BATT SWITCHED

+BATT SWITCHED

B A T T

+BATT 2



KEY SWITCH

+24V +15V -15V +5V

TO ALL CKT BDS

7 CHARGE SCALE SELECT

+24V

POWER-UP DELAY

12

8

4 J10

8

PWR STABLE O R

TRIP BRKR*

+ B A T T

-

+24V

TRIP BRKR


O P E N *

+ B A T T


11

7


J6

+BATT

+ B A T T

B R E A K E R

I-CHARGE FBK-



+ B A T T

10

12


4

9

K150* K149**

10


64A

KLINE2

CHARGER RELAY*

DISCHARGE CYCLE

8A

F10


S U M





C B 1

RAMP GEN

6

I-CHARGE RTN 4 4

MUX

8031 uC ISSUES I-CHARGE CMND & CHARGER RELAY* WHEN LINE SENSED 8031 uC ISSUES TRIP BRKR IF CHARGING CUR FEEDBACK IS NOT WITHIN +/- 20% OF EXPECTED VALUE

CB1

BAT CHARGE4

K-LINE2 TO K196

+24V

VOLTAGE -TOFREQ CONVERT

CHARGE CYCLE

CB1

1

3

D0-D7 DATA BUS

PULSE COUNTER T1

F4

+BATT

F6

I-CHARGE CMND 3



LINE SENSE

J1

BAT CHARGE+

145 VDC REGULATOR

-

FRAME GROUND

117 VAC 60 Hz

F9

F55 RECTIFIER

3 BLK

J11

SCR

+

110 VAC

CORD REEL

+BATT

BREAKER TRIP*

2

8

O R

DETECT >150MA

15-23

J4

2 A N D

J4 5

PWR OK PWR OK

PWR OK

PWR OK

AMX1 A3 F3

S2

BREAKER OPEN*

*K150 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46–288034 **K149 FOR CHARGER BOARD 46–288786 DISCHARGE CYCLE (NORMAL SYSTEM OPERATION) TURNING KEY SWITCH ON APPLIES BATTERY VOLTAGE TO LOAD!

AMX3 A4 COLLIMATOR

AMX1 A2 K1


ARM BRAKE

LOWER COLUMN BRAKE

TUBE PARKED LATCH

S3




REV 11

DIRECTION 46-017207


15-24



APPENDIX

Decimal to Hexadecimal This process works for numbers up to 65535. Compare your number to the columns labeled DEC in the tables on the right. Write down the largest decimal number, and it's hexadecimal equivalent, that you can subtract from your number. Perform the subĆ traction to get your new number. repeat the process until you obtain zero by subtractĆ ing a number from the column labeled First Four Bits. The hexadecimal equivalent is the sum of the hexadecimal numbers you have written.

DECIMAL, HEXADECIMAL AND BINARY EQUIVALENTS Introduction You will need to change values between decimal, hexadecimal, and binary equivalents when using diagnostics. Many pocket calculators have functions to perform the conĆ versions for you. However, a calculator is not always available when need. This page will help with conversions up to 16 bits or 4 hexadecimal characters when you are unĆ able to use your calculator. When using diagnostics you will need to perform four types of conversions: convert from binary to hexadecimal to write a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to binary to read a bit pattern; convert from hexadecimal to decimal to read a value stored as the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number; convert from decimal to hexadecimal to write a value stored as the decimal equivalent of a hexadecimal number.

LEAST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS Third Four Bits

Work with four bits at a time from your eight bit byte, starting with the least significant bits, when converting from binary to hexadecimal. Compare the least significant four bits of your eight bit word to the table on the upper right. Write down the hexadecimal number from the column titled First Four Bits. Compare the most significant four bits of your eight bit word to the table on the lower right. Write down the hexadecimal number from the column titled Second Four Bits to the left of the number for the first four bits. Repeat the process if you need to convert a second eight bit word using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns. The hexadecimal equivalent is the number you have written. Hexadecimal to Binary Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convertĆ ing from hexadecimal to binary. Compare the least significant digit to the column laĆ beled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the binary number from the far right. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second Four Bits in the the table on the lower right. To the left of the first number number, write the binary number from the right column. Repeat the process as need to convert a third or fourth digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find your digit. The binary equivalent is the number you have written. Hexadecimal to Decimal

DEC 1

HEX msb–7 lsb–0

6

5

0H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

0

1H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

0

2H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

0

3H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

0

4H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

1

5H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

1

6H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

1

7H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0

1

8H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

0

9H . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

0

AH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

0

BH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

0

CH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

DH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

EH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

FH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1

MOST SIGNIFICANT FOUR BITS Fourth Four Bits

Second Four Bits

DEC 4 3

A-1

HEX 2

0000H 0 0 0 256100H 1 0 1 512200H 2 1 0 768300H 3 1 1 1024400H 4 0 0 1280500H 5 0 1 1536600H 6 1 0 1792700H 7 1 1 2048800H 8 0 0 2304900H 9 0 1 2560A00H 10 1 0 2816B00H 11 1 1 3072C00H 12 0 0 3328D00H 13 0 1 3584E00H 14 1 0 3840F00H 15 1 1

Binary to Hexadecimal

Work with one number at a time, starting with the least significant digit, when convertĆ ing from hexadecimal to decimal. Compare the least significant digit to the column labeled First Four Bits in the table on the upper right. Write down the decimal number from the column to the left.. Compare the next digit to the column labeled Second Four Bits in the the table on the lower right. Underneath first number number, write the decimal number from the left column. Repeat the process as need to convert a third or fourth digit using the Third Four Bits and Fourth Four Bits Columns to find your digit. The decimal equivalent is the sum number you have written.

First Four Bits

DEC 4 3

HEX 2

DEC 1

HEX msb–7 lsb–0

6

5



REV 11

00000H 0 00H 0 .......... 40961000H 16 10H 1 ....................... 81922000H 32 20H 0 ....................... 122883000H 48 30H 1 ....................... 163844000H 64 40H 0 ....................... 204805000H 80 50H 1 ....................... 245766000H 96 60H 0 ....................... 286727000H 112 70H 1 .......................

0

0

0 .......................

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

DIRECTION 46-017207

327688000H 128 80H 0 ....................... 368649000H 144 90H 1 ....................... 40960A000H 160 A0H 0 ....................... 45056B000H 176 B0H 1 ....................... 49152C000H 192 C0H 0 ....................... 53248D000H 208 D0H 1 ....................... 57344E000H 224 E0H 0 ....................... 61440F000H 240 F0H 1 .......................

A-2

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1




A-3

Amx4 Series Diagnostics

Recommend Documents